1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 0
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 0
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 0
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
149 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
203 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
211 \begin_layout Standard
212 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
213 LatexCommand tableofcontents
220 \begin_layout Chapter
224 \begin_layout Section
225 What is \SpecialChar LyX
229 \begin_layout Standard
231 is a document preparation system.
232 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
233 scripts, publishable books, business
234 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
235 It is unlike most other
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
243 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
245 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
261 pt type, left justified, 5
262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
275 \begin_layout Standard
276 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
281 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
285 \begin_layout Standard
290 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
291 's philosophy: most importantly,
292 the format of all of the manuals.
293 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
294 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
300 manual describes that, too.
303 \begin_layout Section
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
310 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
312 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
313 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
319 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
320 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
322 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
323 only a vertical scrollbar.
324 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
325 The first case is large images.
326 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
327 image and use the option
338 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
341 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
342 this doesn't work for equations yet.
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
347 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
355 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
362 \begin_layout Section
366 \begin_layout Standard
367 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
369 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
371 Just select the manual you want to read from the
378 \begin_layout Section
379 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
383 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
390 \begin_layout Standard
391 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
392 can be configured via the menu
394 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
398 \begin_inset Index idx
401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
408 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 packages are available.
412 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
414 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
416 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
421 \begin_inset space \space{}
424 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
425 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
427 To force \SpecialChar LyX
428 to re-inspect your system, you should use
430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
434 \begin_inset Index idx
437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
438 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
444 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
445 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
448 \begin_layout Section
451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
453 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
460 \begin_layout Standard
461 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
462 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
463 installed, but you will not be
464 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
465 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
466 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
467 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
468 document can always be output as plain text
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
474 or DocBook classes or packages.
475 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
476 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
479 \begin_layout Standard
480 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
481 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
482 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
485 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
493 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
494 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
501 \begin_inset Index idx
504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
505 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
513 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
524 \begin_layout Chapter
525 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
529 \begin_layout Section
530 Basic File Operations
531 \begin_inset Index idx
534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
543 \begin_layout Standard
548 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
549 in addition to some more advanced operations:
552 \begin_layout Itemize
574 \begin_layout Itemize
590 arg "buffer-new-template"
596 \begin_layout Itemize
618 \begin_layout Itemize
628 \begin_layout Itemize
642 \begin_layout Itemize
664 \begin_layout Itemize
676 arg "buffer-write-as"
682 \begin_layout Itemize
696 \begin_layout Itemize
710 \begin_layout Standard
711 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
712 a few minor differences.
715 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
726 command lists the available templates.
727 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
728 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
729 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
737 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
744 \begin_layout Standard
745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
777 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
778 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
779 is just that — a big, blank space.
787 \begin_layout Standard
808 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
813 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
816 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
834 will reload the document from disk.
835 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
836 and want to restore it to the last save.
845 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
846 them as your changes.
849 \begin_layout Section
850 Basic Editing Features
851 \begin_inset Index idx
854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
863 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
870 \begin_layout Standard
871 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
872 can perform cut and paste operations
873 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
874 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
875 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
876 editing features and how to access
878 We will start with cut and paste.
881 \begin_layout Standard
882 As you might expect, the
886 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
887 various other editing features.
888 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
892 \begin_layout Itemize
898 \begin_inset Index idx
901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
930 \begin_layout Itemize
936 \begin_inset Index idx
939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
968 \begin_layout Itemize
974 \begin_inset Index idx
977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1002 \begin_layout Itemize
1006 \begin_inset space ~
1012 \begin_layout Itemize
1016 \begin_inset space ~
1022 \begin_layout Itemize
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1030 \begin_inset space ~
1036 \begin_inset Index idx
1039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1048 \begin_inset Index idx
1051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1066 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1076 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1082 \begin_layout Standard
1083 The first three are self-explanatory.
1084 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1085 and other programs by
1106 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1107 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1112 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1113 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1114 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1115 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1116 into individual cells.
1120 \begin_inset space ~
1125 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1126 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1130 \begin_layout Standard
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1139 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1141 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1143 \begin_inset space ~
1150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1156 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1157 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1158 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1164 \begin_inset space \space{}
1167 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1168 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1171 \begin_inset space ~
1174 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1176 \begin_inset space ~
1180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1184 \begin_inset space ~
1193 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1194 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1196 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1200 \begin_inset space ~
1205 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1206 start a new paragraph.
1207 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1208 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1216 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1233 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 paste from the primary selection.
1237 This is normally the currently selected text.
1240 \begin_layout Standard
1243 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1267 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1273 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 button to skip the current word.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1303 \begin_inset space ~
1308 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1310 If the toggle is set, searching for
1311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1322 will not match the word
1323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1337 Match whole words only
1339 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1340 to only find complete words, e.
1341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1370 offers also an advanced
1373 \begin_inset space ~
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1382 feature that is described in section
1383 \begin_inset space ~
1387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1389 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1396 \begin_layout Standard
1397 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1398 \begin_inset space \space{}
1402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1410 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1412 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1417 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1424 \begin_layout Standard
1428 arg "inset-select-all"
1431 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1432 When the cursor is inside an inset
1435 arg "inset-select-all"
1438 selects the content of the inset.
1442 arg "inset-select-all"
1445 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1450 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1453 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1457 \begin_layout Section
1459 \begin_inset Index idx
1462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1469 \begin_inset Index idx
1472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1481 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1488 \begin_layout Standard
1489 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1491 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1497 or the toolbar button
1503 to undo some mistake.
1504 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1509 or the toolbar button
1516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1523 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1527 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1530 \begin_layout Standard
1531 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1540 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1541 This is a consequence of the 100
1542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1545 step undo limit mentioned above.
1548 \begin_layout Standard
1557 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1608 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1611 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1614 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1615 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1618 \begin_layout Itemize
1619 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1622 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1629 \begin_layout Enumerate
1630 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1634 \begin_layout Standard
1635 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1636 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1640 \begin_layout Section
1642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1644 name "sec:Navigating"
1649 \begin_inset Index idx
1652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1661 \begin_layout Standard
1663 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1671 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1672 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1675 \begin_layout Itemize
1676 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1678 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1680 \begin_inset space ~
1685 or by the toolbar button
1688 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1694 \begin_layout Itemize
1695 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1697 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1700 and use the same menu to return to them.
1701 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1704 \begin_layout Standard
1708 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1713 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1716 \begin_inset space ~
1721 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1722 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1723 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1724 your last editing position.
1727 \begin_layout Standard
1732 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1736 \begin_layout Subsection
1738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1740 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1745 \begin_inset Index idx
1748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1749 Navigating ! Outline
1755 \begin_inset Index idx
1758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1767 \begin_layout Standard
1768 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1769 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1770 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1772 \begin_inset space ~
1776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1778 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1782 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1783 \begin_inset space ~
1787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1789 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1794 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1798 \begin_layout Standard
1799 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1800 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1801 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1802 dialog and to modify the citation.
1805 \begin_layout Standard
1810 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1811 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1813 Labels and References
1815 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1824 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1827 \begin_layout Standard
1828 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1829 you further to control the display.
1834 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1835 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1841 option keeps it in the current view state.
1842 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1843 \begin_inset space ~
1846 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1847 \begin_inset space ~
1850 3, the subsections of sections
1851 \begin_inset space ~
1854 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1859 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1860 \begin_inset space ~
1864 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1874 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1877 \begin_layout Standard
1884 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1885 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1899 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1900 So, for example, you can move section
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1908 2.4 or after section
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1914 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1927 (or the corresponding key bindings
1935 ) you can change the level of sections.
1936 So you can for example make section
1937 \begin_inset space ~
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1951 \begin_layout Standard
1952 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1953 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1956 \begin_layout Subsection
1957 Horizontal Scrolling
1958 \begin_inset Index idx
1961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1970 \begin_layout Standard
1972 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1978 \begin_inset space \space{}
1982 \begin_inset space ~
1985 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1986 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1987 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1991 \begin_layout Standard
1992 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1996 \begin_layout Itemize
1998 is used on a small tablet computer
2001 \begin_layout Itemize
2002 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2014 \begin_inset space ~
2027 \begin_layout Itemize
2028 Math constructs with long command names
2031 \begin_layout Standard
2032 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2033 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2035 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2036 windows so that table
2037 \begin_inset space ~
2041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2043 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2048 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2050 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2051 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2054 \begin_layout Standard
2055 \begin_inset Float table
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2067 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2071 Horizontal scrolling test.
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2081 \begin_inset Tabular
2082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_layout Section
2129 Input/Word Completion
2130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2132 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2137 \begin_inset Index idx
2140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 \begin_layout Standard
2183 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2185 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2186 is used to propose completions.
2189 \begin_layout Standard
2190 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2193 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2198 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2209 \begin_inset space ~
2214 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2218 \begin_inset space ~
2223 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2224 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2228 \begin_inset space ~
2234 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2235 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2236 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2237 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2240 \begin_layout Standard
2242 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2243 completions available.
2248 key to accept a proposed completion.
2249 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2250 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2251 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2259 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2260 ing options for text.
2261 The special math option
2265 enables characters to be composed.
2266 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2267 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2270 , you can then input the characters
2271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2282 to a formula to get it.
2283 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2284 of the math toolbar.
2285 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2289 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2290 's installation folder.
2291 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2300 \begin_layout Section
2302 \begin_inset Index idx
2305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2312 \begin_inset Index idx
2315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2344 \begin_inset Index idx
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2378 \begin_layout Standard
2379 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2393 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2396 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2400 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2401 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2407 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2414 \begin_layout Standard
2418 \begin_inset space ~
2426 \begin_inset space ~
2447 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2451 \begin_layout Labeling
2452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2457 LatexCommand nomenclature
2459 description "Tabulator key"
2466 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2468 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2469 \begin_inset space ~
2473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2475 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2482 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2486 , especially section
2487 \begin_inset space ~
2491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2493 reference "subsec:Lists"
2499 If you are still confused, look in the
2504 \begin_inset Newline newline
2512 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2513 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2517 \begin_layout Labeling
2518 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2522 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2523 LatexCommand nomenclature
2525 description "Escape key"
2533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2540 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2541 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2544 \begin_layout Labeling
2545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2551 \begin_inset space ~
2555 \begin_inset space ~
2562 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2563 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2567 \begin_layout Standard
2568 There are three modifier keys:
2571 \begin_layout Labeling
2572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2590 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2591 LatexCommand nomenclature
2593 description "Control key"
2598 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2599 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2615 \begin_layout Itemize
2624 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2627 \begin_layout Itemize
2636 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2640 \begin_layout Labeling
2641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2659 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2660 LatexCommand nomenclature
2662 description "Shift key"
2667 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2668 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2671 \begin_layout Labeling
2672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2690 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2691 LatexCommand nomenclature
2693 description "Alt or Meta key"
2698 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2699 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2700 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2706 \begin_inset Newline newline
2709 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2711 menu accelerator keys
2714 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2715 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2719 \begin_layout Standard
2720 For example, the sequence
2721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset space ~
2731 \begin_inset space ~
2737 \begin_inset space ~
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2764 \begin_inset space ~
2770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2780 \begin_layout Standard
2785 manual lists all other things bound to the
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2794 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2796 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2797 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2798 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2799 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2800 The \SpecialChar LyX
2801 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2802 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2803 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2805 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2821 followed by a capital
2828 \begin_layout Chapter
2831 \begin_inset Index idx
2834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2844 \begin_layout Section
2846 \begin_inset Index idx
2849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2862 \begin_layout Standard
2863 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2864 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2865 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2866 numbering schemes, and so on.
2867 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2868 and format the title of your document differently.
2871 \begin_layout Standard
2876 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2877 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2878 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2879 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2880 picks one for you by default.
2881 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2884 \begin_layout Subsection
2886 \begin_inset Index idx
2889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2898 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 You can select a class using the
2908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2909 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2913 \begin_inset Index idx
2916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2923 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2931 \begin_layout Standard
2932 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2937 \begin_layout Description
2938 Article for basic articles
2941 \begin_layout Description
2942 Report for basic reports
2945 \begin_layout Description
2946 Book for writing a book
2949 \begin_layout Description
2950 Letter for US-style letters
2953 \begin_layout Standard
2954 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2955 only uses if you have installed
2956 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2958 distributions will include
2960 Here are some of the classes.
2961 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2963 Special Document Classes
2972 \begin_layout Description
2973 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2976 \begin_layout Description
2977 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2981 \begin_layout Description
2982 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2988 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2989 There are three article layouts available.
2990 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2991 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2992 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2993 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2998 sequential numbering
2999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3002 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3003 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3004 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3005 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3008 \begin_layout Description
3009 Beamer Layout for presentations
3012 \begin_layout Description
3013 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3014 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3015 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3016 with \SpecialChar LyX
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3024 \begin_layout Description
3026 \begin_inset space ~
3029 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 Foils Used to make transparencies
3040 \begin_layout Description
3041 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3042 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3043 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3044 with \SpecialChar LyX
3048 \begin_layout Description
3049 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3050 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3053 \begin_layout Description
3054 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3057 \begin_layout Description
3058 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3063 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3064 (Is used by this document.)
3067 \begin_layout Description
3068 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3075 \begin_layout Description
3080 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3081 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3083 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3087 \begin_layout Description
3088 Slides Used to make transparencies
3091 \begin_layout Description
3093 \begin_inset space ~
3096 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3097 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3100 \begin_layout Description
3101 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3104 \begin_layout Standard
3105 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3107 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3109 Special Document Classes
3116 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3117 of the document classes.
3120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3124 \begin_layout Standard
3125 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3130 \begin_inset Index idx
3133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3150 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3151 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3153 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3159 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3164 , are highly specialized.
3166 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3167 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3168 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3169 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3170 by some document class.
3171 There are just too many of them.
3172 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3175 \begin_layout Standard
3176 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3184 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3185 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3186 document class for a new file.
3188 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3191 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 manual for information on how to install them.
3199 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3205 \begin_layout Standard
3206 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3207 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3208 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3209 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3210 class files to be used for dissertation
3211 s submitted to those universities.
3212 The \SpecialChar LyX
3213 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3215 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3219 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3225 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3232 name "subsec:Modules"
3237 \begin_inset Index idx
3240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3249 \begin_layout Standard
3250 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3251 chosen document class.
3252 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3253 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3264 \begin_inset Index idx
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3274 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3278 \begin_layout Standard
3279 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3280 packages or file format converters that are not always
3281 installed by default.
3283 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3284 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3285 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3286 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3288 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3289 file without the missing prerequisites.
3290 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3291 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3298 \begin_inset Index idx
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3302 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3308 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3313 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3325 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3327 will advise you about these things.
3335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3339 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3344 \begin_inset Index idx
3347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3348 Document ! Local Layout
3356 \begin_layout Standard
3357 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3358 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3359 : They are intended to be used in
3360 a variety of different documents.
3361 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3362 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3363 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3364 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3365 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3367 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3385 manual for information on how to use it.
3388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3392 \begin_layout Standard
3393 Each class has a default set of options.
3394 Here's a quick table describing them:
3397 \begin_layout Standard
3398 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3404 \begin_layout Standard
3406 \begin_inset Tabular
3407 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3408 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3867 \begin_layout Standard
3868 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3874 \begin_layout Standard
3875 You're probably also wondering what
3876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3880 \begin_inset space ~
3884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3888 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3889 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3894 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3899 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3909 headings, there are also
3917 headings, and so on.
3918 We will describe these headings fully in section
3919 \begin_inset space ~
3923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3925 reference "subsec:Headings"
3932 \begin_layout Subsection
3934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3936 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3941 \begin_inset Index idx
3944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 \begin_inset Index idx
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3963 \begin_layout Standard
3964 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3973 \begin_inset space ~
3981 \begin_inset space ~
3986 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3988 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3989 doesn't support special options you want to
3990 use for your document.
3991 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3992 -class and its options, you have to read
3996 \begin_layout Standard
4000 \begin_inset space ~
4007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4013 \begin_inset space ~
4018 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4019 You can choose between the following five options:
4022 \begin_layout Labeling
4023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 Use default page style of current class.
4031 \begin_layout Labeling
4032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4037 No page numbers or headings.
4040 \begin_layout Labeling
4041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4049 \begin_layout Labeling
4050 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4055 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4056 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4057 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4058 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4061 \begin_layout Labeling
4062 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4067 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4068 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4074 \begin_inset Index idx
4077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4079 -packages ! fancyhdr
4085 How they are defined is explained in section
4086 \begin_inset space ~
4090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4092 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4099 \begin_layout Standard
4100 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4101 \begin_inset space ~
4105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4107 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4114 \begin_layout Subsection
4115 Paper Size and Orientation
4116 \begin_inset Index idx
4119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4120 Document ! Paper size
4126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4128 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4135 \begin_layout Standard
4136 You can find the following options in the menu
4139 \begin_inset space ~
4146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4150 \begin_inset Index idx
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4162 \begin_layout Labeling
4163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4167 \begin_inset space ~
4172 What size paper to print on.
4177 \begin_layout Itemize
4183 \begin_layout Itemize
4189 \begin_layout Itemize
4195 \begin_layout Itemize
4201 \begin_layout Itemize
4204 US letter, US legal, US executive
4207 \begin_layout Itemize
4213 \begin_layout Itemize
4220 \begin_layout Labeling
4221 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4226 To choose whether to output as
4237 \begin_layout Labeling
4238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4242 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4248 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4251 \begin_layout Subsection
4253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4255 name "subsec:Margins"
4260 \begin_inset Index idx
4263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4270 \begin_inset Index idx
4273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4282 \begin_layout Standard
4283 Paper margins are set in the menu
4285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4289 \begin_inset Index idx
4292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4301 \begin_layout Standard
4302 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4303 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4304 the paper format and the font size into account.
4307 \begin_layout Subsection
4311 \begin_layout Standard
4312 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4318 That includes the paragraph environments.
4319 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4320 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4321 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4323 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4332 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4334 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4335 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4336 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4339 \begin_layout Section
4340 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4341 \begin_inset Index idx
4344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4345 Paragraph ! Indentation
4353 \begin_layout Subsection
4355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4357 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4364 \begin_layout Standard
4365 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4366 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4370 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4371 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4372 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4373 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4377 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4383 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4384 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4385 language than English.
4387 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4390 \begin_layout Standard
4391 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4392 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4393 into \SpecialChar LyX
4395 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4398 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4400 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4401 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4402 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4409 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4410 goes to produce a printable file.
4415 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4417 gives you the ability globally to change
4421 these pre-coded spacings.
4422 We will explain more later.
4425 \begin_layout Subsection
4426 Paragraph Separation
4427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4429 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4434 \begin_inset Index idx
4437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4438 Paragraph ! Separation
4446 \begin_layout Standard
4454 \begin_inset space ~
4462 \begin_inset space ~
4469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4473 \begin_inset Index idx
4476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4482 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4485 \begin_layout Subsection
4489 \begin_layout Standard
4490 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4495 \begin_inset space ~
4500 dialog and toggle the
4503 \begin_inset space ~
4508 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4511 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4515 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4516 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4520 \begin_layout Standard
4521 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4522 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4525 \begin_layout Subsection
4527 \begin_inset Index idx
4530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4531 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4539 \begin_layout Standard
4542 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4546 \begin_inset Index idx
4549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4562 \begin_inset space ~
4571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4572 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4578 \begin_inset Index idx
4581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4583 -packages ! setspace
4588 installed to use this feature.
4593 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4597 \begin_inset space ~
4602 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4603 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4606 \begin_layout Section
4607 Paragraph Environments
4608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4610 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4615 \begin_inset Index idx
4618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4619 Paragraph ! Environments
4625 \begin_inset Index idx
4628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4629 Paragraph environments|(
4637 \begin_layout Subsection
4641 \begin_layout Standard
4642 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4654 } \SpecialChar ldots
4664 \begin_inset Newline newline
4667 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4670 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4671 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4680 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4683 \begin_layout Standard
4684 A paragraph environment is simply a
4685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4692 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4693 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4694 scheme, labels, and so on.
4695 Additionally, you can
4696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4703 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4704 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4705 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4706 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4708 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4710 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4713 \begin_layout Standard
4714 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4715 \begin_inset Graphics
4716 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4722 at the left end of the toolbar.
4724 will change the environment of the
4728 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4729 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4730 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4734 \begin_layout Standard
4743 create a new paragraph using the
4747 paragraph environment.
4749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4756 because if you are in one of these environments:
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4765 \begin_layout Itemize
4771 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 \begin_layout Itemize
4783 \begin_layout Itemize
4789 \begin_layout Itemize
4795 \begin_layout Itemize
4801 \begin_layout Standard
4803 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4807 , rather than resetting it to
4812 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4813 \begin_inset space ~
4817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4819 reference "sec:Nesting"
4826 \begin_layout Subsection
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 The default paragraph environment is
4836 It creates a plain paragraph.
4838 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4839 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4840 this manual) are in the
4847 \begin_layout Standard
4848 You can nest a paragraph using the
4852 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4860 \begin_layout Subsection
4862 \begin_inset Index idx
4865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4874 \begin_layout Standard
4875 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4876 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4885 for thanks or contact information.
4886 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4887 places all of this on a separate page
4888 along with today's date.
4889 For other types of documents, the title
4890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4897 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4901 \begin_layout Standard
4903 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4917 Here's how you use them:
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 Put the title of your document in the
4928 \begin_layout Itemize
4929 Put the author name in the
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
4937 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4938 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4944 Note that using this environment is optional.
4945 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4946 will automatically insert today's date.
4947 If you don't want a date, use the option
4949 Suppress default date on front page
4953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4956 \begin_inset space ~
4964 \begin_layout Standard
4965 You can use footnotes to insert
4966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4973 or contact information.
4976 \begin_layout Subsection
4978 \begin_inset Index idx
4981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4990 name "subsec:Headings"
4997 \begin_layout Standard
4998 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5000 takes care of the numbering for you.
5003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 \begin_inset Index idx
5008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5009 Section headings ! Numbered
5017 \begin_layout Standard
5018 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5022 \begin_layout Enumerate
5028 \begin_layout Enumerate
5034 \begin_layout Enumerate
5040 \begin_layout Enumerate
5046 \begin_layout Enumerate
5052 \begin_layout Enumerate
5058 \begin_layout Enumerate
5064 \begin_layout Standard
5066 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5067 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5068 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5071 \begin_layout Standard
5072 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5073 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5074 You group the book into chapters.
5076 does a similar grouping:
5079 \begin_layout Itemize
5084 is divided into either
5095 \begin_layout Itemize
5107 \begin_layout Itemize
5119 \begin_layout Itemize
5131 \begin_layout Itemize
5143 \begin_layout Itemize
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5156 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5164 Not all document types use the
5168 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5173 is the top-level heading.
5181 \begin_layout Standard
5186 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5187 labels it with its number,
5188 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5190 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5204 \begin_inset Index idx
5207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5208 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5216 \begin_layout Standard
5217 The unnumbered section headings have a
5218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5225 at the end of their name.
5226 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5227 the table of contents, see section
5228 \begin_inset space ~
5232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5242 Changing the Numbering
5243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5245 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5252 \begin_layout Standard
5253 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5254 in the Table of Contents.
5255 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5257 Just as certain classes start with
5271 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5281 This is something you can change.
5284 \begin_layout Standard
5287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5291 \begin_inset Index idx
5294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 \begin_inset space ~
5307 \begin_inset space ~
5312 you will see two counters.
5317 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5318 numbers a section heading.
5319 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5324 Short Titles of Headings
5325 \begin_inset Index idx
5328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5329 Section headings ! Short titles
5335 \begin_inset Argument 1
5338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5347 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5354 \begin_layout Standard
5355 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5356 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5357 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5358 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5361 \begin_layout Standard
5363 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5364 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5365 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5366 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5371 \begin_inset space ~
5377 This will insert a box labeled
5378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5382 \begin_inset space ~
5386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5389 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5390 This also works for captions inside floats.
5391 There can only be one short title per title.
5394 \begin_layout Standard
5395 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5402 \begin_layout Standard
5403 The following information applies to all section headings:
5406 \begin_layout Itemize
5407 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5410 \begin_layout Itemize
5411 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5414 \begin_layout Itemize
5415 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5418 \begin_layout Itemize
5419 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5422 \begin_layout Subsection
5426 \begin_layout Standard
5428 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5442 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5443 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5444 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5445 the text they contain.
5446 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5454 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5457 \begin_layout Standard
5458 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5467 when you start a new paragraph.
5468 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5472 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5473 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5474 have to change back to the
5478 environment yourself.
5481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5490 \begin_inset Index idx
5493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5502 \begin_layout Standard
5503 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5504 time for the differences.
5513 are identical except for one difference:
5517 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5526 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5530 Here's an example of the
5543 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5545 See – no indentation!
5549 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5550 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5551 the other paragraph.
5554 \begin_layout Standard
5555 Here's another example, this time in the
5562 \begin_layout Quotation
5568 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5569 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5570 the first line, then
5574 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5578 you were quoting other text.
5581 \begin_layout Quotation
5582 Here's a new paragraph.
5583 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5584 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5587 \begin_layout Standard
5588 As the examples show,
5592 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5593 They should put quotes in the
5598 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5602 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5607 \begin_inset Index idx
5610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5617 \begin_inset Index idx
5620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5636 \begin_layout Standard
5641 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5647 \begin_inset Newline newline
5650 Which I did not rehearse!
5654 It could be much worse.
5655 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5657 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5658 indented a bit more than the first.
5659 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5665 \begin_inset Newline newline
5668 And make things look fine
5669 \begin_inset Newline newline
5675 arg "newline-insert newline"
5681 \begin_layout Standard
5686 does not indent both margins.
5687 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5688 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5691 arg "newline-insert newline"
5697 \begin_layout Subsection
5699 \begin_inset Index idx
5702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5718 \begin_layout Standard
5720 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5730 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5731 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5740 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5741 lets you provide your own label.
5742 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5743 describing some general features of all four of them.
5746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5750 \begin_layout Standard
5751 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5753 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5754 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5763 reset the environment to
5767 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5768 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5769 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5773 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5777 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5784 \begin_layout Standard
5785 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5786 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5787 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5789 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5790 you read all of section
5791 \begin_inset space ~
5795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5797 reference "sec:Nesting"
5804 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5806 \begin_inset Index idx
5809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5825 \begin_layout Standard
5826 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5830 paragraph environment.
5831 It has the following properties:
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5835 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5839 \begin_layout Itemize
5841 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5845 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5849 \begin_layout Itemize
5850 The items can have any length.
5852 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5853 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5860 \begin_layout Itemize
5865 environment inside another
5869 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5873 \begin_layout Itemize
5874 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5877 \begin_layout Itemize
5879 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5882 \begin_layout Itemize
5884 \begin_inset space ~
5888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5890 reference "sec:Nesting"
5894 for a full explanation of nesting.
5898 \begin_layout Standard
5899 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5908 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5911 \begin_layout Standard
5912 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5913 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5916 \begin_layout Itemize
5917 The label for the first level
5921 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5925 \begin_layout Itemize
5926 The label for the second level is a dash.
5930 \begin_layout Itemize
5931 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5935 \begin_layout Itemize
5936 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5940 \begin_layout Itemize
5941 Back out to the third level.
5945 \begin_layout Itemize
5946 Back to the second level.
5950 \begin_layout Itemize
5951 Back to the outermost level.
5954 \begin_layout Standard
5955 These are the default labels for an
5960 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5965 dialog in the submenu
5970 \begin_inset Index idx
5973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5979 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5983 \begin_layout Standard
5984 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5985 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5987 \begin_inset space ~
5991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5993 reference "sec:Nesting"
6000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6002 \begin_inset Index idx
6005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6014 name "sec:Enumerate"
6021 \begin_layout Standard
6026 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6027 It has these properties:
6030 \begin_layout Enumerate
6031 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6035 \begin_layout Enumerate
6036 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 environment resets the counter to one.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 \begin_layout Enumerate
6067 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6068 Items can have any length.
6071 \begin_layout Enumerate
6072 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6075 \begin_layout Enumerate
6076 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6079 \begin_layout Enumerate
6080 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6084 \begin_layout Standard
6093 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6095 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6096 labels the four different levels in an
6103 \begin_layout Enumerate
6104 The first level of an
6108 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6112 \begin_layout Enumerate
6113 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6117 \begin_layout Enumerate
6118 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6122 \begin_layout Enumerate
6123 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6126 \begin_layout Enumerate
6127 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6132 \begin_layout Enumerate
6133 Back to the third level
6137 \begin_layout Enumerate
6138 Back to the second level.
6142 \begin_layout Enumerate
6143 Back to the outermost level.
6146 \begin_layout Standard
6147 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6151 environment, see section
6152 \begin_inset space ~
6156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6158 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6163 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6168 There is more to nesting
6172 environments than we've stated here.
6173 You should read section
6174 \begin_inset space ~
6178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6180 reference "sec:Nesting"
6184 to learn more about nesting.
6187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6189 \begin_inset Index idx
6192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6202 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6206 list has no fixed label.
6207 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6216 of the first line as the label.
6220 \begin_layout Description
6221 Example: This is an example of the
6228 \begin_layout Standard
6230 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6234 \begin_layout Standard
6236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6243 it is meant that the first usage of the
6247 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6249 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6257 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6265 \begin_inset space ~
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6277 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6281 for more information.) Here is an example:
6284 \begin_layout Description
6286 \begin_inset space ~
6289 Example: This one shows how to use a
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_layout Description
6305 Usage: You should use the
6309 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6310 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6312 It's not a good idea to use a
6316 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6317 You're better off using
6329 paragraphs into them.
6332 \begin_layout Description
6333 Nesting: You can nest
6337 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6341 \begin_layout Standard
6342 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6343 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6344 them from the first line.
6347 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6349 \begin_inset Index idx
6352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6361 \begin_layout Standard
6366 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6367 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6380 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6382 Here are its properties:
6385 \begin_layout Labeling
6386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6388 \begin_inset space ~
6391 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6400 of each line as the item label.
6405 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6406 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6407 space as described above.
6410 \begin_layout Labeling
6411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6412 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6413 uses different margins for the item label and the
6414 body of the item text.
6415 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6416 label width plus a little extra space.
6420 \begin_layout Labeling
6421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6423 \begin_inset space ~
6426 width \SpecialChar LyX
6427 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6428 If the label width is larger, the label
6429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6436 into the first line.
6437 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6438 margin of the rest of the item text.
6441 \begin_layout Labeling
6442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6444 \begin_inset space ~
6447 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6452 environment has the same left margin.
6453 \begin_inset Newline newline
6456 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6461 \begin_inset space ~
6466 dialog (toolbar button
6469 arg "layout-paragraph"
6476 \begin_inset space ~
6481 determines the default label width.
6482 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6491 multiple times instead.
6492 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6502 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6505 \begin_inset space ~
6510 every time you alter a label in a
6515 \begin_inset Newline newline
6518 The predefined default width is the length of
6519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6527 \begin_inset space ~
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6538 list the same way as the
6542 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6548 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6552 \begin_layout Standard
6557 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6558 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6560 \begin_inset space ~
6564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6566 reference "sec:Nesting"
6570 to learn about nesting.
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 There is yet another feature of the
6578 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6579 left-justifies the item labels by
6581 You can use additional
6585 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6586 justifies the item label.
6591 are documented in section
6592 \begin_inset space ~
6596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6598 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6603 Here are some examples:
6606 \begin_layout Labeling
6607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6608 Left The default for
6615 \begin_layout Labeling
6616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6624 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6627 \begin_layout Labeling
6628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6629 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6633 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6640 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6643 \begin_layout Subsection
6645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6647 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6652 \begin_inset Index idx
6655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6664 \begin_layout Standard
6665 The features described in this section require that the module
6667 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6669 is loaded in the document settings.
6670 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6676 \begin_inset Index idx
6679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6681 -packages ! enumitem
6689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6690 Custom Enumerate Lists
6691 \begin_inset Index idx
6694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6695 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6703 \begin_layout Standard
6705 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6711 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6712 There you add the command
6715 \begin_layout Standard
6723 \begin_layout Standard
6735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6736 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6737 Code, look at section
6738 \begin_inset space ~
6742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6744 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6757 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6764 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6765 For capital Roman numerals replace
6777 in the command above.
6778 For Arabic numerals use
6786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6793 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6808 \begin_layout Standard
6810 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6818 You can only number 26
6819 \begin_inset space ~
6822 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6830 \begin_layout Standard
6831 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6832 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6835 \begin_layout Standard
6836 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6839 \begin_layout Enumerate
6840 \begin_inset Argument 1
6843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6869 \begin_layout Enumerate
6870 \begin_inset Argument 1
6873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6896 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_layout Enumerate
6902 \begin_inset Argument 1
6905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6929 \begin_layout Enumerate
6930 \begin_inset Argument 1
6933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6959 \begin_layout Standard
6960 For this list these commands were used:
6963 \begin_layout Standard
6974 \begin_inset Newline newline
6982 \begin_inset Newline newline
6990 \begin_inset Newline newline
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7007 makes the label emphasized and
7016 \begin_layout Standard
7017 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7025 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7026 lists until you change the definition.
7034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7036 \begin_inset Index idx
7039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7040 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7048 \begin_layout Standard
7049 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7052 \begin_layout Enumerate
7053 \begin_inset Argument 1
7056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7075 \begin_inset Note Note
7078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 goes back to default numbering
7087 \begin_layout Enumerate
7091 \begin_layout Standard
7095 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7099 \begin_layout Standard
7100 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7105 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7106 to indicate that it is a resumed
7107 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7108 , but in the output.
7111 \begin_layout Standard
7112 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7120 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7129 \begin_layout Standard
7130 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7132 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7133 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7134 of a normal enumeration.
7135 There, insert the command
7138 \begin_layout Standard
7144 \begin_layout Standard
7149 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7157 \begin_layout Enumerate
7161 \begin_layout Standard
7162 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7165 \begin_layout Enumerate
7166 \begin_inset Argument 1
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7185 This enumeration starts at 4
7188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7190 \begin_inset Index idx
7193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7202 \begin_layout Standard
7203 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7205 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7208 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 \begin_layout Itemize
7213 with standard spacing
7216 \begin_layout Standard
7217 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7219 Add there the command
7223 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7226 \begin_layout Itemize
7227 \begin_inset Argument 1
7230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7249 \begin_layout Itemize
7253 \begin_layout Itemize
7257 \begin_layout Standard
7258 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7265 \begin_inset Index idx
7268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7270 -packages ! enumitem
7276 For more information see its documentation,
7277 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7287 \begin_layout Standard
7288 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7290 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7291 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7295 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7298 \begin_layout Enumerate
7299 \begin_inset Argument 1
7302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7310 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7323 \begin_layout Enumerate
7324 with negative indentation
7327 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7328 Further Customization
7329 \begin_inset Index idx
7332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7333 Lists ! Customization
7341 \begin_layout Standard
7342 You can also change the style of description lists.
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7353 changes the description label font, the command
7356 \begin_layout Standard
7362 \begin_layout Standard
7363 sets the list style.
7366 \begin_layout Standard
7367 An example where the command
7370 \begin_layout Standard
7375 itshape, style=nextline
7378 \begin_layout Standard
7382 \begin_layout Description
7384 \begin_inset space ~
7388 \begin_inset Argument 1
7391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7397 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7399 itshape, style=nextline
7409 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7410 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7414 \begin_layout Description
7416 \begin_inset space ~
7419 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7420 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7421 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7424 \begin_layout Standard
7425 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7431 \begin_inset Index idx
7434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7436 -packages ! enumitem
7442 For more information see its documentation
7443 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7453 \begin_layout Subsection
7455 \begin_inset Index idx
7458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7469 \begin_inset space ~
7472 Address: An Overview
7475 \begin_layout Standard
7476 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7477 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7485 \begin_inset space ~
7491 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7492 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7493 gags on the document.
7494 In contrast, you can use the
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7506 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7507 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7512 Of course, you're not limited to using
7519 \begin_inset space ~
7528 \begin_inset space ~
7533 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7534 some European academic papers.
7537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7541 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7548 \begin_layout Standard
7553 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7554 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7558 \begin_inset space ~
7563 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7564 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7565 Here's an example of each:
7568 \begin_layout Right Address
7570 \begin_inset Newline newline
7574 \begin_inset Newline newline
7578 \begin_inset Newline newline
7581 When is it? What is today?
7584 \begin_layout Standard
7588 \begin_inset space ~
7594 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7596 the largest block of text on a single line.
7597 Here's an example of the
7604 \begin_layout Address
7606 \begin_inset Newline newline
7609 Where do I send this
7610 \begin_inset Newline newline
7613 Your post office and country
7616 \begin_layout Standard
7617 As you can see, both
7624 \begin_inset space ~
7629 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7634 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7635 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7641 This makes sense, since
7649 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7650 Thus, you have to use
7657 arg "newline-insert newline"
7662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7665 \begin_inset space ~
7669 \begin_inset space ~
7674 ) to start a new line in an
7681 \begin_inset space ~
7689 \begin_layout Subsection
7693 \begin_layout Standard
7694 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7695 or list of references.
7697 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7702 \begin_inset Index idx
7705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7714 \begin_layout Standard
7719 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7720 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7721 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7722 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7736 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7737 The book document classes ignores the
7741 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7745 in a letter document class.
7748 \begin_layout Standard
7753 environment does several things for you.
7754 First, it puts the centered label
7755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7763 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7765 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7766 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7767 the subsequent text.
7768 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7770 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7774 \begin_layout Standard
7775 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7779 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7780 The new paragraph will still be in the
7785 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7786 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7789 \begin_layout Standard
7790 \begin_inset Float figure
7795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7797 \begin_inset Graphics
7798 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7806 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7811 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7832 \begin_layout Standard
7833 We would love to demonstrate the
7837 environment, but since this document is in the
7838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7845 class, we can't do this.
7846 We inserted it therefore as figure
7847 \begin_inset space ~
7851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7853 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7858 If you have never heard of an
7859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7866 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7869 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7871 \begin_inset Index idx
7874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7883 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7890 \begin_layout Standard
7895 environment is used to list references.
7896 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7897 only use it at the end of the document.
7909 \begin_layout Standard
7910 When you first open a
7914 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7915 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7931 depending on the document class.
7932 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7933 Each paragraph of the
7937 environment is a bibliography entry.
7942 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7943 Each new paragraph is still in the
7950 \begin_layout Standard
7951 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7952 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7954 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7956 handling, have a look at section
7957 \begin_inset space ~
7961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7963 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7970 \begin_layout Subsection
7971 Special Environments
7974 \begin_layout Standard
7976 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7977 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7985 \begin_inset Index idx
7988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7998 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8005 \begin_layout Standard
8011 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8013 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8018 key as a fixed whitespace.
8022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8035 \begin_inset space ~
8040 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8058 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8061 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8064 arg "newline-insert newline"
8081 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8082 So, when you finish using the
8087 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8088 Also, you can nest the
8093 environment inside of others.
8096 \begin_layout Standard
8097 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8100 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8107 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8112 \begin_inset space \space{}
8122 arg "newline-insert newline"
8128 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 arg "newline-insert newline"
8142 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8148 \begin_layout Itemize
8149 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8150 You must put at least one
8154 in any line you want blank.
8155 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8159 \begin_layout Itemize
8160 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8164 since that will insert
8169 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8172 arg "self-insert \""
8178 \begin_layout Standard
8182 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8186 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8199 printf("Hello World!
8204 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8208 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8212 \begin_layout Standard
8213 This is just the standard
8214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8225 \begin_layout Standard
8231 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8233 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8234 as if you used a typewriter.
8235 \begin_inset Index idx
8238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8239 Paragraph environments|)
8244 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8247 Program Code Listings
8252 \begin_inset space ~
8260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8264 \begin_inset Index idx
8267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8276 \begin_layout Standard
8281 environment is similar to the
8286 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8287 computer console text.
8292 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8306 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8307 you can have empty lines.
8320 \begin_layout Itemize
8321 have a certain language and a text style
8324 \begin_layout Itemize
8325 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8326 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8327 and \SpecialChar TeX
8331 \begin_layout Standard
8332 Because of these properties
8336 works like a typewriter.
8340 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 \begin_layout Verbatim
8347 The following 2 lines are empty:
8350 \begin_layout Verbatim
8354 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8364 \begin_layout Standard
8369 environment is identical to
8373 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8374 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8381 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8385 \begin_layout Section
8386 Nesting Environments
8387 \begin_inset Index idx
8390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8391 Nesting ! Environments
8397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8406 \begin_layout Subsection
8410 \begin_layout Standard
8412 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8414 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8416 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8418 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8430 \begin_layout Enumerate
8434 \begin_layout Enumerate
8439 \begin_layout Enumerate
8443 \begin_layout Enumerate
8448 \begin_layout Enumerate
8452 \begin_layout Standard
8453 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8454 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8456 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8458 \begin_inset space ~
8462 \begin_inset space ~
8470 \begin_inset space ~
8474 \begin_inset space ~
8479 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8481 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8484 arg "depth-increment"
8490 arg "depth-decrement"
8504 arg "depth-increment"
8510 arg "depth-decrement"
8514 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8515 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8519 \begin_layout Standard
8520 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8521 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8522 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8523 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8524 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8527 \begin_layout Standard
8528 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8530 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8532 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8535 \begin_layout Subsection
8536 What You Can and Can't Nest
8539 \begin_layout Standard
8540 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8541 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8544 \begin_layout Standard
8545 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8546 than a simple yes or no.
8547 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8550 \begin_layout Itemize
8551 Completely unnestable
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8564 \begin_layout Standard
8565 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8566 environments have them:
8569 \begin_layout Description
8570 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8571 Can't nest into them.
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8581 \begin_layout Itemize
8587 \begin_layout Itemize
8593 \begin_layout Itemize
8599 \begin_layout Itemize
8606 \begin_layout Description
8608 \begin_inset space ~
8611 Nestable You can nest them.
8612 You can nest other things into them.
8616 \begin_layout Itemize
8622 \begin_layout Itemize
8628 \begin_layout Itemize
8634 \begin_layout Itemize
8640 \begin_layout Itemize
8646 \begin_layout Itemize
8652 \begin_layout Itemize
8658 \begin_layout Itemize
8665 \begin_layout Itemize
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8678 \begin_layout Description
8679 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8680 You can't nest anything into them.
8684 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8744 \begin_layout Itemize
8750 \begin_layout Itemize
8756 \begin_layout Itemize
8762 \begin_layout Itemize
8766 \begin_inset space ~
8772 \begin_layout Itemize
8779 \begin_layout Standard
8780 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8788 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8798 \begin_inset space ~
8801 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8802 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8803 nested section headings violate this.
8811 \begin_layout Subsection
8812 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8813 \begin_inset Index idx
8816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8817 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8825 \begin_layout Standard
8826 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8827 affected by nesting anyhow.
8831 \begin_layout Itemize
8835 \begin_layout Itemize
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8845 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8853 Figures and tables in
8857 are not affected by this.
8862 Have a look at section
8863 \begin_inset space ~
8867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8869 reference "sec:Floats"
8873 for more information about
8880 \begin_layout Standard
8882 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8883 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8887 \begin_layout Standard
8888 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8896 of its own, it behaves just like a
8897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8904 paragraph environment.
8905 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8910 Here's an example with a table:
8913 \begin_layout Enumerate
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8919 This is (a) and it's nested.
8923 \begin_layout Standard
8924 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8930 \begin_layout Standard
8932 \begin_inset Tabular
8933 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8934 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8935 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8936 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9020 \begin_layout Standard
9021 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9028 \begin_layout Enumerate
9030 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9034 \begin_layout Enumerate
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9042 \begin_layout Enumerate
9047 \begin_layout Enumerate
9048 This is (a) and it's nested.
9052 \begin_layout Standard
9053 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9059 \begin_layout Standard
9061 \begin_inset Tabular
9062 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9063 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9149 \begin_layout Standard
9150 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9156 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9166 \begin_layout Enumerate
9170 \begin_layout Standard
9171 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9175 \begin_layout Standard
9176 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9179 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9182 \begin_layout Enumerate
9187 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 This is (a) and it's nested.
9191 \begin_layout Standard
9192 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9198 \begin_layout Standard
9200 \begin_inset Tabular
9201 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9202 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9289 \begin_layout Standard
9290 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9296 \begin_layout Enumerate
9298 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9305 \begin_layout Enumerate
9309 \begin_layout Standard
9310 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9316 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9317 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9321 \begin_layout Subsection
9322 Usage and General Features
9325 \begin_layout Standard
9326 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9327 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9336 is the innermost possible depth.
9337 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9340 \begin_layout Enumerate
9341 level #1 – outermost
9345 \begin_layout Enumerate
9350 \begin_layout Enumerate
9355 \begin_layout Enumerate
9360 \begin_layout Itemize
9365 \begin_layout Itemize
9374 \begin_layout Standard
9375 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9376 both of them in the example.
9377 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9387 For example, if we tried to nest another
9392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9399 , we would get errors.
9402 \begin_layout Subsection
9404 \begin_inset Index idx
9407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9416 \begin_layout Standard
9417 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9418 We have several examples of nested environments.
9419 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9423 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9424 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9427 \begin_layout Labeling
9428 \labelwidthstring MMM
9429 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9438 \begin_layout Labeling
9439 \labelwidthstring MMM
9440 #2-a This is level #2.
9441 We created it by using
9444 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9450 arg "depth-increment"
9457 \begin_layout Labeling
9458 \labelwidthstring MMM
9459 #3-a This is level #3.
9460 This time, we just enter
9467 arg "depth-increment"
9471 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9475 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9481 arg "depth-increment"
9488 \begin_layout Standard
9493 environment, nested inside of
9494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9502 So, it's at level #4.
9503 We did this by entering
9506 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9512 arg "depth-increment"
9515 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9520 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9536 \begin_layout Standard
9541 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9544 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9550 \begin_layout Labeling
9551 \labelwidthstring MMM
9552 #4-a This is level #4.
9556 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9559 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9564 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9568 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9573 keep nesting things inside
9574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9585 \begin_layout Labeling
9586 \labelwidthstring MMM
9587 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9592 \begin_layout Labeling
9593 \labelwidthstring MMM
9594 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9595 and this is level #6.
9596 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9600 \begin_layout Labeling
9601 \labelwidthstring MMM
9602 #5-b Back to level #5.
9606 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9612 arg "depth-decrement"
9619 \begin_layout Labeling
9620 \labelwidthstring MMM
9624 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9630 arg "depth-decrement"
9633 , we're back at level #4.
9637 \begin_layout Labeling
9638 \labelwidthstring MMM
9639 #3-b Back to level #3.
9640 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9644 \begin_layout Labeling
9645 \labelwidthstring MMM
9646 #2-b Back to level #2.
9651 \begin_layout Labeling
9652 \labelwidthstring MMM
9653 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9654 After this sentence, we will enter
9658 and change the paragraph environment back to
9665 \begin_layout Standard
9666 We could have also used the
9682 environment in place of the
9687 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9691 Example 2: Inheritance
9694 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9695 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9698 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9707 arg "depth-increment"
9711 \begin_inset Newline newline
9714 which, we will change to the
9722 \begin_layout Enumerate
9727 environment, at level #2.
9730 \begin_layout Enumerate
9731 Notice how the nested
9735 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9739 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9743 \begin_layout Standard
9744 We ended this example by entering
9749 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9753 and reset the nesting depth by using
9756 arg "depth-decrement"
9762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9763 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9772 \begin_inset Argument 1
9775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9776 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9784 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 This is level #1, in an
9789 paragraph environment.
9790 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9794 \begin_layout Enumerate
9799 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9805 arg "depth-increment"
9809 Now, what happens if we nest an
9813 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9814 label be? An asterisk?
9818 \begin_layout Itemize
9828 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9829 So, its label is a bullet.
9830 (We got here by using
9833 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9839 arg "depth-increment"
9842 , then changing the environment to
9850 \begin_layout Itemize
9851 Here's level #4, produced using
9854 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9860 arg "depth-increment"
9864 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9869 \begin_layout Enumerate
9872 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9877 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9881 , because we are in the
9889 environment (that is, it is an
9904 \begin_layout Enumerate
9909 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9910 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9914 \begin_layout Enumerate
9915 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9918 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9921 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9924 \begin_layout Enumerate
9928 arg "depth-decrement"
9931 to decrease the depth after the next
9934 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9943 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9948 \begin_layout Enumerate
9950 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9951 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9955 \begin_layout Enumerate
9956 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9965 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9970 reset the counter for the label.
9974 \begin_layout Enumerate
9978 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9984 arg "depth-decrement"
9987 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9988 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9989 into the twofold-nested
9997 \begin_layout Enumerate
9998 The same thing happens if we do another
10001 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10007 arg "depth-decrement"
10010 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10013 \begin_layout Standard
10014 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10019 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10030 The number of other
10034 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10041 The same rule applies for the
10045 environment, as well.
10048 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10049 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10052 \begin_layout Enumerate
10053 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10054 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10055 the same detail with how we did it.
10064 \begin_layout Standard
10072 arg "depth-increment"
10079 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10080 the example in parentheses someplace.
10081 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10082 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10083 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10087 \begin_layout Enumerate
10092 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10096 \begin_layout Verse
10097 Now we will add verse.
10098 \begin_inset Newline newline
10101 It will get much worse.
10102 \begin_inset Newline newline
10112 arg "depth-increment"
10122 \begin_layout Verse
10123 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10124 \begin_inset Newline newline
10127 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10128 \begin_inset Newline newline
10134 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10142 \begin_layout Verse
10143 Here comes a table:
10147 \begin_layout Standard
10148 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10154 \begin_layout Standard
10156 \begin_inset Tabular
10157 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10158 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10245 \begin_layout Verse
10249 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10259 arg "depth-increment"
10265 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10271 \begin_inset Newline newline
10279 arg "depth-decrement"
10286 \begin_layout Enumerate
10291 : level #1) This is another item.
10292 Note that selecting a
10296 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10297 3 times to put the table inside the
10305 \begin_layout Quotation
10306 We're now ending the
10310 list and changing to
10315 We're still at level #1.
10316 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10317 The next set of paragraphs is a
10318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10325 We will nest both the
10332 \begin_inset space ~
10337 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10341 for the letter body.
10345 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10348 to preserve the depth.
10349 Remember that you need to use
10352 arg "newline-insert newline"
10355 to create multiple lines inside the
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10372 \begin_layout Right Address
10374 \begin_inset Newline newline
10377 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10378 \begin_inset Newline newline
10384 \begin_layout Address
10386 \begin_inset space ~
10392 \begin_layout Quotation
10393 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10397 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10398 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10399 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10400 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10401 as soon as possible.
10402 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10405 \begin_layout Quotation
10406 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10407 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10408 with your order, along with payment.
10411 \begin_layout Quotation
10412 We thank you again for your patience.
10415 \begin_layout Address
10417 \begin_inset Newline newline
10424 \begin_layout Quotation
10425 That ends that example!
10428 \begin_layout Standard
10429 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10430 gives you a lot of power with just
10432 We could have easily nested an
10453 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10456 \begin_layout Subsection
10458 \begin_inset Index idx
10461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10462 Nesting ! Separation
10468 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10470 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10477 \begin_layout Standard
10478 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10480 For example you need two different enumerations:
10483 \begin_layout Enumerate
10488 \begin_layout Enumerate
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Standard
10498 \begin_inset Separator plain
10504 \begin_layout Itemize
10510 \begin_layout Standard
10511 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10517 \begin_layout Enumerate
10521 \begin_layout Enumerate
10525 \begin_layout Enumerate
10529 \begin_layout Standard
10530 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10531 list item and use the menu
10533 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10534 Start New Environment
10537 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10538 ) and behind it the new list.
10541 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10542 Start New Parent Environment
10544 only appears if the item is nested.
10545 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10549 \begin_layout Standard
10550 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10551 (red arrow in LyX).
10552 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10553 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10556 \begin_layout Standard
10557 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10560 arg "paragraph-break"
10567 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10570 \begin_layout Section
10571 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10572 \begin_inset Index idx
10575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10584 \begin_layout Standard
10585 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10586 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10588 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10589 be broken at the end of a line.
10590 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10594 \begin_layout Subsection
10596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10598 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10603 \begin_inset Index idx
10606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10615 \begin_layout Standard
10616 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10617 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10618 ) not to break the line at
10620 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10623 \begin_layout Quote
10624 Further documentation is given in section
10625 \begin_inset Newline newline
10629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10631 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10639 \begin_layout Standard
10640 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10655 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10664 A protected space is set with
10666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10667 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10669 \begin_inset space ~
10677 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10683 \begin_layout Subsection
10685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10687 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10692 \begin_inset Index idx
10695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10696 Spacing ! Horizontal
10704 \begin_layout Standard
10705 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10708 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10712 The length units are listed in Appendix
10713 \begin_inset space ~
10717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10719 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10730 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10735 \begin_inset Index idx
10738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10739 Spaces ! Inter-word
10747 \begin_layout Standard
10748 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10749 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10750 at the ends of sentences.
10751 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10752 automatically takes care about this.
10753 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10754 followed by a period; see section
10755 \begin_inset space ~
10759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10761 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10766 To insert a normal space, select
10768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10769 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10771 \begin_inset space ~
10779 arg "space-insert normal"
10785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10789 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10794 \begin_inset Index idx
10797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10806 \begin_layout Standard
10808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10815 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10824 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10825 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10826 inside abbreviations:
10829 \begin_layout Quote
10831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10835 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10838 \begin_layout Standard
10839 or between values and units.
10840 Compare for example this:
10841 \begin_inset Newline newline
10845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10849 \begin_inset Newline newline
10852 10 kg (normal space
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10856 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10869 arg "space-insert thin"
10875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10879 \begin_layout Standard
10880 You can also insert the following space types:
10883 \begin_layout Description
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10892 space A line with a
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10897 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10904 negative thin space between the arrows.
10907 \begin_layout Description
10909 \begin_inset space ~
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10916 space A line with a
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10921 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10928 negative medium space between the arrows.
10931 \begin_layout Description
10933 \begin_inset space ~
10937 \begin_inset space ~
10940 space A line with a
10941 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10945 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10952 negative thick space between the arrows.
10955 \begin_layout Description
10957 \begin_inset space ~
10961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10965 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10969 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10973 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10977 \begin_inset space ~
10981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10984 em) space between the arrows.
10987 \begin_layout Description
10989 \begin_inset space ~
10993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10997 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11001 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11009 \begin_inset space ~
11013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11016 em) space between the arrows.
11019 \begin_layout Description
11021 \begin_inset space ~
11025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11029 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11033 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11037 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11041 \begin_inset space ~
11045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11048 em) space between the arrows.
11051 \begin_layout Description
11053 \begin_inset space ~
11057 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11061 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11066 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11073 cm space between the arrows.
11076 \begin_layout Standard
11078 \begin_inset space ~
11082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11084 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11088 lists the different space sizes.
11091 \begin_layout Standard
11092 \begin_inset Float table
11097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11098 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11103 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11107 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11117 \begin_inset Tabular
11118 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11119 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11120 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11121 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11237 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11396 \begin_inset Index idx
11399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11408 \begin_layout Standard
11409 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11410 feature for adding extra space
11411 in a uniform fashion.
11412 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11413 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11414 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11415 equally between themselves.
11418 \begin_layout Standard
11419 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11422 \begin_layout Quote
11424 This is on the left side
11425 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11428 This is on the right
11431 \begin_layout Quote
11434 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11444 \begin_layout Quote
11447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11451 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11461 \begin_layout Standard
11462 That was an example in the
11468 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11472 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11476 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11479 is one in a standard paragraph.
11480 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11484 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11488 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11491 \begin_inset space ~
11496 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11523 \begin_layout Standard
11525 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11537 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11541 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11549 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11553 \begin_inset space ~
11559 \begin_layout Standard
11561 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11565 \begin_inset space ~
11571 \begin_layout Standard
11572 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11580 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11584 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11586 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11587 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11591 option in the space dialog.
11599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11603 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11608 \begin_inset Index idx
11611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11620 \begin_layout Standard
11621 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11622 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11625 \begin_layout Standard
11626 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11629 What is correct English?:
11630 \begin_inset Newline newline
11634 \begin_inset Newline newline
11638 \begin_inset space ~
11641 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11642 \begin_inset Newline newline
11646 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11657 \begin_inset Newline newline
11661 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11672 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11678 \begin_layout Standard
11680 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11685 \begin_inset space ~
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11697 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11700 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11704 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11710 \begin_inset space ~
11714 \begin_inset space ~
11718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11721 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11730 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11731 That is why it is named
11732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11740 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11741 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11745 \begin_layout Subsection
11747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11749 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11754 \begin_inset Index idx
11757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11766 \begin_layout Standard
11767 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11772 \begin_inset space ~
11778 There you find the following sizes:
11781 \begin_layout Standard
11794 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11795 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11800 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11802 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11803 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11805 \begin_inset space ~
11811 \begin_inset Index idx
11814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11815 Document ! Settings
11820 for the paragraph separation.
11821 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11832 \begin_layout Standard
11838 \begin_inset Index idx
11841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11847 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11848 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11853 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11854 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11863 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11872 s are described in section
11873 \begin_inset space ~
11877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11879 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11888 If there are several
11892 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11893 You can therefore use
11897 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11900 \begin_layout Standard
11905 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11906 \begin_inset space ~
11910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11912 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11919 \begin_layout Standard
11920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11930 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11931 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11943 \begin_layout Subsection
11944 Paragraph Alignment
11945 \begin_inset Index idx
11948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11949 Paragraph ! Alignment
11957 \begin_layout Standard
11958 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11960 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11963 dialog (toolbar button
11966 arg "layout-paragraph"
11970 There are five possibilities:
11973 \begin_layout Itemize
11981 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11987 \begin_layout Itemize
11995 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12001 \begin_layout Itemize
12009 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12015 \begin_layout Itemize
12023 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12029 \begin_layout Itemize
12037 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12043 \begin_layout Standard
12044 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12045 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12046 the left and right margins.
12047 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12052 This paragraph is right aligned,
12055 \begin_layout Standard
12057 this one is centered,
12060 \begin_layout Standard
12062 this one is left aligned.
12065 \begin_layout Subsection
12067 \begin_inset Index idx
12070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12071 Page breaks ! Forced
12077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12079 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12087 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12088 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12089 force a page break where you want one.
12090 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12091 is good at page breaking.
12092 Only if you use a lot of
12096 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12097 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12100 \begin_layout Standard
12101 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12102 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12106 have to change the page breaking.
12109 \begin_layout Standard
12110 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12112 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 \begin_inset space ~
12123 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12128 \begin_inset space ~
12133 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12135 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12136 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12139 \begin_layout Standard
12140 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12141 at the top of a page.
12142 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12144 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12145 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12146 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12150 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12154 to learn more about
12161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12165 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12170 \begin_inset Index idx
12173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12174 Page breaks ! Clear
12182 \begin_layout Standard
12183 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12184 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12185 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12186 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12187 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12190 \begin_layout Standard
12191 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 \begin_inset space ~
12202 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 \begin_inset space ~
12211 \begin_inset space ~
12216 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12217 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12220 \begin_layout Subsection
12222 \begin_inset Index idx
12225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12234 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12241 \begin_layout Standard
12242 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12244 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 \begin_inset space ~
12253 \begin_inset space ~
12261 arg "newline-insert newline"
12265 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 \begin_inset space ~
12274 \begin_inset space ~
12282 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12285 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12287 This is useful to avoid
12288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12295 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12298 \begin_layout Standard
12299 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12300 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12302 very good at line breaking.
12303 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12304 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12305 \begin_inset space ~
12309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12311 reference "sec:Quote"
12316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12318 reference "sec:Verse"
12323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12325 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12332 \begin_layout Subsection
12334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12336 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12341 \begin_inset Index idx
12344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12353 \begin_layout Standard
12355 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12366 \begin_layout Standard
12370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12371 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12373 \begin_inset space ~
12378 you can insert horizontal lines.
12379 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12380 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12381 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12384 \begin_layout Standard
12386 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12397 \begin_layout Section
12398 Characters and Symbols
12401 \begin_layout Standard
12402 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12403 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12404 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12412 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12416 for information on how this is done.
12419 \begin_layout Standard
12420 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12425 dialog via the menu
12427 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12428 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12434 \begin_layout Standard
12435 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12443 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12444 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12446 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12454 \begin_layout Section
12455 Fonts and Text Styles
12456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12458 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12465 \begin_layout Subsection
12467 \begin_inset Index idx
12470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12479 \begin_layout Standard
12480 There are two types of fonts:
12483 \begin_layout Description
12485 \begin_inset space ~
12489 \begin_inset Index idx
12492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12498 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12503 characters) in the font.
12504 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12505 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12506 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12507 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12508 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12509 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12510 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12511 \begin_inset Newline newline
12514 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12515 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12516 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12517 sizes than at small ones.
12518 \begin_inset Newline newline
12532 \begin_inset space ~
12540 \begin_layout Description
12542 \begin_inset space ~
12546 \begin_inset Index idx
12549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12555 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12556 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12557 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12558 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12559 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12560 image manipulation program.
12561 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12562 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12566 pixels high up to 34
12567 \begin_inset space ~
12570 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12571 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12572 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12574 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12575 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12576 \begin_inset Newline newline
12579 Bitmap fonts are named
12582 \begin_inset space ~
12587 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12590 \begin_layout Standard
12591 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12592 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12593 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12594 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12595 use scalable fonts.
12598 \begin_layout Standard
12599 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12602 \begin_layout Standard
12603 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12604 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12605 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12606 font to emphasize text, you use an
12607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12615 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12617 In \SpecialChar LyX
12618 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12622 \begin_layout Subsection
12625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12627 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12634 \begin_layout Standard
12635 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12636 used its own fonts.
12637 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12638 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12641 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12642 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12643 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12644 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12645 to a word processor.
12646 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12647 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12648 files are very portable across
12649 different machines.
12650 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 has increased a lot
12652 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12655 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12657 \begin_inset space ~
12661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12663 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12668 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12669 code in the document
12670 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12673 \begin_layout Standard
12674 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12675 engines that are also able directly
12676 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12678 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12680 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12682 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12683 that is installed on your system.
12684 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12687 \begin_layout Standard
12688 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12696 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12697 es; so you might have to experiment.
12705 \begin_layout Subsection
12706 Document Font and Font size
12707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12709 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12714 \begin_inset Index idx
12717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12724 \begin_inset Index idx
12727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12736 \begin_layout Standard
12737 You can set the document fonts in the
12739 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12743 \begin_inset Index idx
12746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12747 Document ! Settings
12757 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12758 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12761 \begin_inset space ~
12770 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12772 \begin_inset space ~
12775 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12778 \begin_layout Standard
12783 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12784 This requires that you use
12796 as the output format, i.
12797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12801 \begin_inset space \space{}
12804 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12805 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12806 installed (see section
12807 \begin_inset space ~
12811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12813 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12818 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12820 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12821 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12823 \begin_inset space ~
12826 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12827 cannot determine the family.
12828 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12829 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12832 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12835 \begin_layout Standard
12836 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12837 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12842 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12848 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12849 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12857 \begin_inset space ~
12863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12876 European Computer Modern
12879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12886 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12889 \begin_layout Standard
12898 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12899 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12904 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12907 \begin_inset space ~
12912 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12918 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12919 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12922 \begin_layout Itemize
12926 \begin_inset space ~
12931 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12944 \begin_inset space ~
12949 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12950 community in order to replace
12954 as the default font.
12955 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12956 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12959 \begin_inset space ~
12972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12973 One difference is improved kerning.
12981 \begin_layout Itemize
12985 \begin_inset space ~
12989 \begin_inset space ~
12994 fonts in (the rare) case that
12997 \begin_inset space ~
13002 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13017 Virtual means that it
13018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13029 -glyphs from other fonts.
13030 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13052 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13058 \begin_inset Index idx
13061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13063 -packages ! aeguill
13068 with the document preamble line
13069 \begin_inset Newline newline
13076 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13077 \begin_inset Newline newline
13082 will fix the guillemet problem.
13087 and that accented characters are not
13091 glyph, but built of
13095 characters, the accent and the letter.
13096 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13102 If you search for example for the French word
13103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13110 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13119 and not for the glyph
13120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13134 \begin_layout Itemize
13135 If you do not like the look of
13143 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13148 \begin_inset space ~
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13164 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13168 serif and typewriter fonts,
13172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13173 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13180 \begin_inset space ~
13189 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13194 \begin_inset space \space{}
13202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13206 \begin_inset space \space{}
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13220 \begin_inset space ~
13230 but you can also select your own.
13231 \begin_inset Newline newline
13234 The differences between roman,
13237 \begin_inset space ~
13246 fonts are explained in section
13247 \begin_inset space ~
13251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13253 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13258 \begin_inset Newline newline
13264 \begin_inset space ~
13269 was originally designed for newspapers.
13270 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13271 into the small newspaper columns.
13275 \begin_inset space ~
13280 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13283 \begin_layout Standard
13284 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13297 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13302 depends on the class you are using.
13303 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13306 \begin_layout Standard
13307 Note that the font size is the
13312 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13313 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13314 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13315 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13324 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13331 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13338 \begin_layout Standard
13342 \begin_inset space ~
13347 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13349 \begin_inset space ~
13352 serif or typewriter.
13357 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13367 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13370 \begin_layout Standard
13375 LaTeX font encoding
13377 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13378 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13384 \begin_inset Index idx
13387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13389 -packages ! fontenc
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13401 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13406 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13407 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13414 \begin_layout Standard
13415 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13417 Use Old Style Figures
13421 Use True Small Caps
13424 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13427 Use Old Style Figures
13429 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13431 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13439 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13443 Use True Small Caps
13445 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13446 of scaled capitals.
13447 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13448 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13451 \begin_layout Standard
13456 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13457 a font to display the script characters.
13461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13462 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13468 \begin_inset Index idx
13471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13478 So this has no effect for the document language
13492 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13496 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13504 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13509 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13510 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13512 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13514 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13517 dialog, see section
13518 \begin_inset space ~
13522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13524 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13536 \begin_layout Subsection
13540 \begin_layout Standard
13541 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13542 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13544 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13545 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13546 choose a math font in the dialog
13548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13552 \begin_inset Index idx
13555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13556 Document ! Settings
13562 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13563 automatically selects a math font.
13564 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13565 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13574 \begin_inset space ~
13580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13585 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13586 document font is available.
13589 \begin_layout Standard
13590 Note that the math font will not be used for
13594 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13600 or by the insertion of the command
13607 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13608 \begin_inset space ~
13612 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13613 while the math characters do not.
13615 \begin_inset space ~
13618 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13621 \begin_inset space ~
13629 \begin_inset space ~
13634 in the document font settings.
13637 \begin_layout Standard
13638 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13639 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13640 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13641 font (in most cases
13642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13648 \begin_inset space ~
13654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13657 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13658 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13666 \begin_inset space ~
13672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13678 \begin_layout Subsection
13679 Using Different Character Styles
13680 \begin_inset Index idx
13683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13690 \begin_inset Index idx
13693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13702 \begin_layout Standard
13703 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13704 automatically changes the character style for certain
13705 paragraph environments.
13707 supports two character styles,
13716 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13720 \begin_layout Standard
13725 style, do one of the following:
13728 \begin_layout Itemize
13729 click on the toolbar button
13738 \begin_layout Itemize
13739 use the key binding
13748 \begin_layout Standard
13749 These commands are all toggles.
13754 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13757 \begin_layout Standard
13758 One typically uses the
13762 style for proper names.
13764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13771 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13779 \begin_layout Standard
13780 A more widely used character style is the
13785 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13792 \begin_layout Itemize
13793 clicking on the toolbar button
13802 \begin_layout Itemize
13803 using the keybindings
13812 \begin_layout Standard
13817 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13819 use a different font.
13822 \begin_layout Standard
13823 We've been using the
13827 style all over the place in this document.
13828 Here's one more example:
13831 \begin_layout Quotation
13834 Do not overuse character styles!
13837 \begin_layout Standard
13838 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13839 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13840 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13841 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13845 \begin_layout Standard
13846 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13854 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13856 \begin_inset space ~
13859 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13865 arg "dialog-show character"
13871 \begin_layout Subsection
13872 Fine-Tuning with the
13877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13879 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13884 \begin_inset Index idx
13887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13896 \begin_layout Standard
13897 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13899 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13900 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13901 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13902 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13903 from ordinary dialog.
13906 \begin_layout Standard
13907 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13908 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13909 \begin_inset Newline newline
13912 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13913 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13916 \begin_layout Standard
13917 To use custom character styles, open the
13919 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13921 \begin_inset space ~
13924 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13927 dialog or press the toolbar button
13930 arg "dialog-show character"
13934 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13935 font property that you can choose.
13936 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13939 \begin_inset space ~
13944 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13949 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13950 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13951 environments all at once.
13954 \begin_layout Standard
13955 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13958 \begin_inset space ~
13970 \begin_layout Labeling
13971 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13985 The possible options are:
13989 \begin_layout Labeling
13990 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13995 This is the Roman font family.
13996 Normally a serif font.
13997 It's also the default family.
14007 \begin_layout Labeling
14008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14012 \begin_inset space ~
14019 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14031 \begin_layout Labeling
14032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14039 This is the Typewriter font family.
14045 arg "font-typewriter"
14054 \begin_layout Labeling
14055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14060 This corresponds to the print weight.
14065 \begin_layout Labeling
14066 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14071 This is the Medium font series.
14072 It's also the default series.
14075 \begin_layout Labeling
14076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14083 This is the Bold font series.
14096 \begin_layout Labeling
14097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14102 As the name implies.
14107 \begin_layout Labeling
14108 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14113 This is the Upright font shape.
14114 It's also the default shape.
14117 \begin_layout Labeling
14118 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14132 s the Italic font shape
14138 \begin_layout Labeling
14139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14146 This is the Slanted font shape
14148 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14149 , this is different from italic).
14152 \begin_layout Labeling
14153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14157 \begin_inset space ~
14164 This is the Small caps font shape
14171 \begin_layout Labeling
14172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14177 Alters the text color.
14178 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14182 \begin_inset space ~
14187 , which means that the document default color set in
14189 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14190 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14196 \begin_inset space ~
14201 is used, you can choose between
14278 \begin_inset Index idx
14281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14290 \begin_layout Labeling
14291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14296 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14297 the language of the document.
14298 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14299 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14301 \begin_inset Newline newline
14304 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14306 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14307 When using the spell checking (see section
14308 \begin_inset space ~
14312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14314 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14318 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14321 \begin_layout Labeling
14322 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14327 Alters the size of the font.
14328 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14329 proportional to the document font size.
14330 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14331 the details, but a general description of what
14337 \begin_layout Labeling
14338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14359 arg "font-size tiny"
14365 \begin_layout Labeling
14366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14387 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14393 \begin_layout Labeling
14394 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14415 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14421 \begin_layout Labeling
14422 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14443 arg "font-size small"
14449 \begin_layout Labeling
14450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14464 It's also the default size.
14468 arg "font-size normal"
14474 \begin_layout Labeling
14475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14496 arg "font-size large"
14502 \begin_layout Labeling
14503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14524 arg "font-size larger"
14530 \begin_layout Labeling
14531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14552 arg "font-size largest"
14558 \begin_layout Labeling
14559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14580 arg "font-size huge"
14586 \begin_layout Labeling
14587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14608 arg "font-size giant"
14614 \begin_layout Labeling
14615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14620 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14640 arg "font-size increase"
14646 \begin_layout Labeling
14647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14652 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14672 arg "font-size decrease"
14679 \begin_layout Standard
14684 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14685 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14687 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14688 — use those instead.
14689 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14692 \begin_layout Labeling
14693 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14698 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14703 \begin_layout Labeling
14704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14711 This is text with emphasize on
14714 This might seem like the same as
14718 , but it is actually a bit different.
14724 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14726 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14729 \begin_layout Labeling
14730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14737 This is text with Underbar on.
14743 arg "font-underline"
14749 \begin_inset Newline newline
14754 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14755 when you could not change fonts.
14756 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14757 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14758 because some people
14762 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14765 \begin_layout Labeling
14766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14770 \begin_inset space ~
14777 This is text with Double underbar on.
14783 arg "font-underunderline"
14787 \begin_inset Newline newline
14790 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14791 about double underbar.
14794 \begin_layout Labeling
14795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14799 \begin_inset space ~
14806 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14812 arg "font-underwave"
14816 \begin_inset Newline newline
14819 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14820 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14823 \begin_layout Labeling
14824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14831 This is text with Strikeout on.
14837 arg "font-strikeout"
14841 \begin_inset Newline newline
14844 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14845 changed in the meantime.
14848 \begin_layout Labeling
14849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14856 This is text with Noun on.
14863 , this is a logical attribute.
14864 Normally it's equivalent to
14867 \begin_inset space ~
14876 \begin_layout Standard
14877 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14878 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14880 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14882 \begin_inset space ~
14885 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14891 arg "dialog-show character"
14894 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14895 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14898 arg "textstyle-apply"
14902 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14906 \begin_layout Standard
14907 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14914 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14915 (suppose you just set the shape to
14916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14934 \begin_inset space ~
14946 \begin_layout Standard
14947 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14955 \begin_inset space ~
14967 \begin_layout Itemize
14973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14980 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14998 \begin_inset Newline newline
15002 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15016 \begin_inset Note Note
15019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15020 For more on phantoms see section
15021 \begin_inset space ~
15025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15027 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15037 \begin_inset Newline newline
15043 \begin_layout Itemize
15048 fonts use characters with serifs.
15049 These are the small
15050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15057 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15058 The following example shows the difference:
15059 \begin_inset Newline newline
15063 \begin_inset Newline newline
15068 text without serifs
15071 \begin_inset Newline newline
15074 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15075 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15082 \begin_layout Itemize
15087 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15088 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15089 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15092 \begin_layout Standard
15093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15100 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15101 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15104 \begin_inset space ~
15109 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15110 the property to be removed.
15111 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15112 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15113 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15131 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15132 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15140 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15144 \begin_inset space ~
15149 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15160 If you, for example, set
15161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15179 \begin_inset space ~
15184 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15193 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15196 \begin_layout Standard
15197 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15198 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15201 \begin_layout Section
15202 Printing and Previewing
15205 \begin_layout Subsection
15209 \begin_layout Standard
15210 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15211 using \SpecialChar LyX
15212 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15213 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15214 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15215 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15217 Additional Features
15222 \begin_layout Standard
15224 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15227 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15228 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15229 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15232 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15233 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15234 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15235 to turn your writing into printable output.
15236 This happens in two stages:
15239 \begin_layout Enumerate
15240 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15241 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15243 a file with the extension,
15244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15258 \begin_layout Enumerate
15259 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15260 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15261 to use the commands in the
15265 file to produce printable output.
15268 \begin_layout Subsection
15269 Output file formats
15270 \begin_inset Index idx
15273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15282 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15289 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15290 Simple text (ASCII)
15291 \begin_inset Index idx
15294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15295 File formats ! ASCII
15303 \begin_layout Standard
15304 This file type has the extension
15305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15317 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15321 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15328 \begin_layout Standard
15329 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15331 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15332 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15334 \begin_inset space ~
15340 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15341 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15342 bibliography (section
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15349 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15354 If your document includes such material, use
15356 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15357 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15359 \begin_inset space ~
15363 \begin_inset space ~
15367 \begin_inset space ~
15375 \begin_inset space ~
15379 \begin_inset space ~
15385 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15386 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15392 \begin_inset Index idx
15395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15396 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15405 \begin_layout Standard
15406 This file type has the extension
15407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15418 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15421 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15422 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15423 -Errors or to process it manually
15424 with console commands.
15425 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15426 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15427 's temporary directory whenever you
15428 view or export your document.
15431 \begin_layout Standard
15432 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15433 -file using the menu
15435 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15436 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15440 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15441 export variants are explained in section
15442 \begin_inset space ~
15446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15448 reference "subsec:Export"
15455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15457 \begin_inset Index idx
15460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15469 \begin_layout Standard
15470 This file type has the extension
15471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15491 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15492 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15493 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15497 \begin_layout Standard
15498 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15499 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15500 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15501 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15502 when you view the DVI.
15503 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15506 \begin_layout Standard
15507 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15509 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15510 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15515 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15516 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15518 \begin_inset space ~
15524 The latter option uses the program
15526 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15532 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15535 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15536 font access (see section
15537 \begin_inset space ~
15541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15543 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15548 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15549 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15554 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15556 \begin_inset Index idx
15559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15560 File formats ! PostScript
15568 \begin_layout Standard
15569 This file type has the extension
15570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15582 PostScript was developed by the company
15586 as a printer language.
15587 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15589 PostScript can be seen as a
15590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15593 programming language
15594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15597 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15602 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15609 \begin_inset Index idx
15612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15614 -packages ! pstricks
15624 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15627 \begin_layout Standard
15628 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15632 Encapsulated PostScript
15633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15636 (EPS, file extension
15637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15649 As \SpecialChar LyX
15650 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15651 convert them in the background to EPS.
15652 If, for example, you have 50
15653 \begin_inset space ~
15656 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15658 \begin_inset space ~
15661 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15662 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15664 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15665 EPS to avoid this problem.
15668 \begin_layout Standard
15669 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15671 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15672 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15678 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15680 \begin_inset Index idx
15683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15690 \begin_inset Index idx
15693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15702 \begin_layout Standard
15703 This file type has the extension
15704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15720 Portable Document Format
15721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15728 was derived from PostScript.
15729 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15738 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15739 looks exactly the same.
15742 \begin_layout Standard
15743 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15747 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15751 (JPG, file extension
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15779 Portable Network Graphics
15780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15783 (PNG, file extension
15784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15796 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15797 converts them in the
15798 background to one of these formats.
15799 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15800 will slow down your workflow.
15801 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15804 \begin_layout Standard
15805 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15807 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15813 \begin_layout Description
15815 \begin_inset space ~
15818 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15822 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15825 \begin_layout Description
15827 \begin_inset space ~
15834 ) This uses the program
15836 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15839 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15842 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15845 is a new engine, derived from
15849 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15850 access (see section
15851 \begin_inset space ~
15855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15857 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15862 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15863 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15868 \begin_layout Description
15870 \begin_inset space ~
15877 ) This uses the program
15882 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15888 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15889 font access (see section
15890 \begin_inset space ~
15894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15896 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15901 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15902 vertically written Japanese.
15905 \begin_layout Description
15907 \begin_inset space ~
15910 (cropped) This is the same as
15913 \begin_inset space ~
15918 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15919 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15920 to generate good-looking
15921 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15924 \begin_layout Description
15926 \begin_inset space ~
15929 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15933 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15937 \begin_layout Description
15939 \begin_inset space ~
15942 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15946 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15947 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15951 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15952 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15955 \begin_layout Standard
15959 \begin_inset space ~
15968 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15969 works without problems.
15970 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15971 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15975 \begin_inset space ~
15983 \begin_inset space ~
15988 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15996 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15998 \begin_inset Index idx
16001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16002 FileFormats ! XHTML
16008 \begin_inset Index idx
16011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16020 \begin_layout Standard
16021 This file type has the extension
16022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16034 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16035 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16036 When \SpecialChar LyX
16037 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16038 suitable for the purpose.
16039 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16042 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16045 between different formats, which are described in section
16047 Math Output in XHTML
16052 \begin_inset space ~
16060 \begin_layout Standard
16061 XHTML output remains
16062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16069 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16070 features are supported yet.
16074 and the World Wide Web
16078 Additional Features
16080 manual, for more information.
16083 \begin_layout Standard
16084 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16086 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16087 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16093 \begin_layout Subsection
16095 \begin_inset Index idx
16098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16107 \begin_layout Standard
16108 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16109 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16118 or use the toolbar button
16125 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16126 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16127 \begin_inset space ~
16131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16133 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16137 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16139 \begin_inset space ~
16143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16145 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16150 Further output formats can be selected via
16152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16153 View (Other Formats)
16155 or the toolbar button
16164 \begin_layout Standard
16165 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16166 viewer window using the menu
16168 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16174 Update (Other Formats)
16179 \begin_layout Standard
16180 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16183 To have a real output, export your document.
16186 \begin_layout Section
16187 A few Words about Typography
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16200 \begin_layout Subsection
16201 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16202 \begin_inset Index idx
16205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16212 \begin_inset Index idx
16215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16224 \begin_layout Standard
16225 In \SpecialChar LyX
16227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16238 character comes in four lengths: the
16250 , and the minus sign:
16251 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16257 \begin_layout Standard
16258 \begin_inset Tabular
16259 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16260 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16261 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16262 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16263 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16264 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16293 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16333 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16360 \begin_inset space ~
16363 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16370 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16397 \begin_inset space ~
16400 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16421 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16461 \begin_layout Standard
16462 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16474 character multiple times in a row.
16475 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16476 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16509 \begin_layout Standard
16510 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16511 math mode and has a length of its own.
16512 Here are some examples:
16515 \begin_layout Enumerate
16516 line- and page-breaks
16517 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16527 \begin_layout Enumerate
16529 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16539 \begin_layout Enumerate
16540 Oh — there's a dash.
16541 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16551 \begin_layout Enumerate
16552 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16556 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16566 \begin_layout Subsection
16568 \begin_inset Index idx
16571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16580 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16587 \begin_layout Standard
16588 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16589 but automatically in the output.
16590 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16596 \begin_inset Index idx
16599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16606 following the rules of the document language.
16609 \begin_layout Standard
16611 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16615 font and with unusual constructs, like
16616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16624 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16625 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16626 This is done with the menu
16628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16629 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16631 \begin_inset space ~
16637 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16639 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16643 \begin_layout Standard
16644 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16645 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16656 would then see the hyphen
16657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16664 as a hyphenation possibility.
16665 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16666 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16667 as described in section
16669 Prevent Hyphenation
16674 \begin_inset space ~
16682 \begin_layout Subsection
16684 \begin_inset Index idx
16687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16697 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16700 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16707 \begin_layout Standard
16708 When \SpecialChar LyX
16709 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16710 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16712 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16718 appropriate amount of space.
16719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16722 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16724 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16725 gets after another word.
16728 \begin_layout Standard
16729 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16730 not work in all cases.
16732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16743 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16744 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16747 \begin_layout Standard
16748 Here are some examples of
16752 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16755 \begin_layout Itemize
16760 \begin_layout Itemize
16765 \begin_layout Standard
16766 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16769 \begin_layout Itemize
16771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16775 this is too much space!
16778 \begin_layout Itemize
16783 \begin_layout Standard
16784 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16787 \begin_layout Standard
16788 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16791 \begin_layout Enumerate
16795 \begin_inset space ~
16800 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16801 \begin_inset space ~
16805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16807 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16812 \begin_inset Index idx
16815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16816 Spaces ! inter-word
16824 \begin_layout Enumerate
16828 \begin_inset space ~
16833 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16834 \begin_inset space ~
16838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16840 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16845 \begin_inset Index idx
16848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16857 \begin_layout Enumerate
16861 \begin_inset space ~
16865 \begin_inset space ~
16869 \begin_inset space ~
16876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16878 \begin_inset space ~
16883 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16884 This function is also bound to
16887 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16893 \begin_layout Standard
16894 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16897 \begin_layout Itemize
16899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16903 \begin_inset space \space{}
16906 this is too much space!
16909 \begin_layout Itemize
16910 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16914 \begin_layout Standard
16915 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16916 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16918 will take care of this.
16921 \begin_layout Standard
16922 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16926 \begin_inset space ~
16932 feature described in the section
16934 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16939 Additional Features
16944 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16946 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16948 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16952 \begin_inset Index idx
16955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16957 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16959 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16968 \begin_inset Index idx
16971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16973 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16975 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17008 \begin_layout Standard
17011 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
17013 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
17017 Specifically, it will
17018 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17020 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17024 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17026 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17029 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17030 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17032 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17045 The keyboard character,
17049 , generates this automatically.
17052 \begin_layout Standard
17053 You can specify what character the
17058 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17062 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17071 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17075 \begin_inset Index idx
17078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17079 Document ! Settings
17085 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17087 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17093 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17096 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17097 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17101 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17103 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756786
17109 \begin_layout Labeling
17110 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17113 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17124 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17134 \begin_inset space ~
17138 \begin_inset space ~
17142 \begin_inset Quotes els
17146 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17154 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17164 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17166 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17170 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17178 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17180 \begin_inset Quotes els
17184 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17187 quotation marks (as common, e.
17188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17196 \begin_layout Labeling
17197 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17199 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17202 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17206 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17210 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17212 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17216 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17220 \begin_inset space ~
17224 \begin_inset space ~
17228 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17232 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17240 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17241 Use quotes like ”this”
17242 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17244 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17248 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17252 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17256 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17259 quotation marks (as common, e.
17260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17268 \begin_layout Labeling
17269 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17271 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17274 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17278 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17282 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17284 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17288 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17292 \begin_inset space ~
17296 \begin_inset space ~
17300 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17304 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17312 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17314 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17318 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17322 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17324 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17328 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17332 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17336 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17339 quotation marks (as common, e.
17340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17348 \begin_layout Labeling
17349 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17351 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17354 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17358 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17362 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17364 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17368 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17372 \begin_inset space ~
17376 \begin_inset space ~
17380 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17384 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17392 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17394 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17398 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17402 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17404 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17408 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17412 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17416 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17419 quotation marks (as common, e.
17420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17428 \begin_layout Labeling
17429 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17431 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17434 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17438 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17442 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17444 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17448 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17452 \begin_inset space ~
17456 \begin_inset space ~
17460 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17464 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17472 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17474 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17478 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17482 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17484 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17488 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17492 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17496 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17499 quotation marks (as common, e.
17500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17503 g., in Switzerland)
17508 \begin_layout Labeling
17509 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17511 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17514 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17518 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17522 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17524 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17528 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17532 \begin_inset space ~
17536 \begin_inset space ~
17540 \begin_inset Quotes als
17544 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17552 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17554 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17558 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17562 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17564 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17568 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17572 \begin_inset Quotes als
17576 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17579 quotation marks (as common, e.
17580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17586 \begin_layout Labeling
17587 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17589 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17592 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17596 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17600 \begin_inset space ~
17604 \begin_inset space ~
17608 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17612 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17618 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17622 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17626 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17630 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17633 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17636 \begin_layout Labeling
17637 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17639 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17642 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17646 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17650 \begin_inset space ~
17654 \begin_inset space ~
17658 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17662 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17668 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17672 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17676 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17680 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17683 quotation marks (as common, e.
17684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17687 g., in Great Britain)
17690 \begin_layout Labeling
17691 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17693 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17696 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17700 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17704 \begin_inset space ~
17708 \begin_inset space ~
17712 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17716 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17722 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17726 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17730 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17734 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17737 quotation marks (as common, e.
17738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17744 \begin_layout Labeling
17745 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17747 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17750 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17754 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17758 \begin_inset space ~
17762 \begin_inset space ~
17766 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17770 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17776 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17780 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17784 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17788 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17791 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17797 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17798 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17799 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17800 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17801 the inner marks differ).
17811 \begin_layout Labeling
17812 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17814 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17817 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17821 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17825 \begin_inset space ~
17829 \begin_inset space ~
17833 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17837 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17843 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17847 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17851 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17855 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17858 quotation marks (as common, e.
17859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17865 \begin_layout Labeling
17866 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17868 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756796
17871 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17875 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17879 \begin_inset space ~
17883 \begin_inset space ~
17887 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17891 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17897 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17901 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17905 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17909 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17912 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17915 \begin_layout Labeling
17916 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17918 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757086
17919 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17927 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17933 \begin_inset space ~
17937 \begin_inset space ~
17943 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17951 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17955 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17959 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17963 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17967 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17970 quotation marks (as common, e.
17971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17980 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757158
17981 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17982 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17992 \begin_layout Labeling
17993 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17995 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
17996 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18004 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18010 \begin_inset space ~
18014 \begin_inset space ~
18020 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18028 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18032 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18036 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18040 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18044 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18047 quotation marks (as common, e.
18048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18051 g., in North Korea and China)
18055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18057 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18058 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18059 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18069 \begin_layout Standard
18071 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
18073 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
18077 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
18079 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
18084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18086 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
18087 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18088 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18089 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18097 does not necessarily mean
18098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18106 This is why we call them
18107 \begin_inset Quotes els
18111 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18132 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
18133 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18135 \begin_inset Quotes els
18139 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18143 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
18145 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
18146 can be obtained by means of
18151 arg "quote-insert inner"
18155 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
18158 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18164 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18168 \begin_layout Standard
18170 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18171 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18172 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18173 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18174 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18175 If you check the setting
18177 Use dynamic quotation marks
18181 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18182 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18185 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18186 they appear in a special color).
18187 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18188 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18193 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18196 \begin_layout Standard
18198 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18199 Individual quotation marks (i.
18200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18203 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18204 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18210 \begin_layout Subsection
18212 \begin_inset Index idx
18215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18216 Typography ! Ligatures
18222 \begin_inset Index idx
18225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18256 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18263 \begin_layout Standard
18264 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18265 print them as single characters.
18266 These groups are known as
18271 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18272 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18274 Here are the standard ligatures:
18277 \begin_layout Itemize
18281 \begin_layout Itemize
18285 \begin_layout Itemize
18289 \begin_layout Itemize
18293 \begin_layout Itemize
18297 \begin_layout Standard
18298 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18301 \begin_layout Standard
18302 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18303 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18311 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18327 To break a ligature, use
18329 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18330 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18332 \begin_inset space ~
18339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18350 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18367 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18375 \begin_layout Subsection
18377 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18379 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18381 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18385 \begin_inset Index idx
18388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18398 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18405 \begin_layout Standard
18408 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18409 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18413 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18416 \begin_layout Description
18418 The name of the game.
18421 \begin_layout Description
18423 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18427 \begin_layout Description
18429 The \SpecialChar TeX
18430 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18434 \begin_layout Description
18435 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18436 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18440 \begin_layout Standard
18441 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18447 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18455 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18456 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18457 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18458 converges to the number
18459 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18462 : The actual version is
18463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18471 , the previous one was
18472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18483 \begin_layout Subsection
18485 \begin_inset Index idx
18488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18497 \begin_layout Standard
18498 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18499 space between two words.
18500 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18510 for units use the menu
18512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18513 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18515 \begin_inset space ~
18523 arg "space-insert thin"
18529 \begin_layout Standard
18530 Here is an example to show the differences:
18533 \begin_layout Standard
18534 \begin_inset Tabular
18535 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18536 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18537 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18538 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18545 \begin_inset space ~
18549 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18561 space between number and unit
18568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18577 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18589 half space between number and unit
18602 \begin_layout Subsection
18604 \begin_inset Index idx
18607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18608 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18616 \begin_layout Standard
18617 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18619 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18620 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18621 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18622 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18623 These bits of text became known as
18634 \begin_layout Standard
18635 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18636 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18637 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18638 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18639 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18640 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18641 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18642 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18643 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18644 \begin_inset Newline newline
18652 \begin_inset Newline newline
18660 \begin_inset Newline newline
18663 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18664 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18665 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18667 \begin_inset space ~
18671 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18673 key "latexcompanion"
18679 \begin_inset space ~
18683 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18690 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18691 's page break mechanism.
18694 \begin_layout Chapter
18695 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18698 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18705 \begin_layout Standard
18706 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18709 \begin_inset space ~
18715 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18718 \begin_layout Section
18720 \begin_inset Index idx
18723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18739 \begin_layout Standard
18741 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18744 \begin_layout Description
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18750 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18751 \begin_inset Newline newline
18755 \begin_inset Note Note
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18759 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18767 \begin_layout Description
18768 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18769 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18770 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18773 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18774 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18776 \begin_inset space ~
18782 \begin_inset Newline newline
18786 \begin_inset Note Comment
18789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18790 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18799 \begin_layout Description
18801 \begin_inset space ~
18804 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18805 set in the document settings under
18807 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18809 \begin_inset space ~
18815 \begin_inset Newline newline
18819 \begin_inset Newline newline
18823 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18833 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18838 of a comment that appears in the output.
18844 \begin_inset Newline newline
18848 \begin_inset Newline newline
18851 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18854 \begin_layout Standard
18855 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18863 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18867 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18870 \begin_layout Section
18872 \begin_inset Index idx
18875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18884 name "sec:Footnotes"
18891 \begin_layout Standard
18893 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18899 or the toolbar button
18902 arg "footnote-insert"
18914 \begin_inset Graphics
18915 filename clipart/footnote.png
18924 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18925 's representation of your footnote.
18935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18954 label, the box will
18958 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18959 Clicking on the box label again will close
18972 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18973 and click on the footnote
18988 \begin_layout Standard
18989 Here is an example footnote:
18997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18998 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19006 \begin_layout Standard
19007 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19008 position where the footnote box is placed.
19009 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19010 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19011 according to the document class.
19013 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19014 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19020 ey are described in the
19023 \begin_inset space ~
19031 \begin_layout Section
19033 \begin_inset Index idx
19036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19045 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19052 \begin_layout Standard
19053 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19055 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19057 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19059 \begin_inset space ~
19064 or the toolbar button
19067 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19093 appearing within your text.
19094 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19095 's representation of your margin
19104 \begin_layout Standard
19105 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19109 \begin_inset Marginal
19112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19114 This is a marginal note.
19122 \begin_layout Standard
19123 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19124 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19125 pages, right on odd pages.
19128 \begin_layout Standard
19129 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19132 \begin_inset space ~
19140 \begin_inset space ~
19148 \begin_layout Section
19149 Graphics and Images
19150 \begin_inset Index idx
19153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19160 \begin_inset Index idx
19163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19172 name "sec:Graphics"
19179 \begin_layout Standard
19180 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19181 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19184 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19189 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19193 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19196 \begin_layout Standard
19197 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19202 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19203 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19205 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19206 \begin_inset space ~
19210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19212 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19219 \begin_layout Standard
19224 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19225 of the image in the output.
19226 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19230 \begin_inset space ~
19234 \begin_inset space ~
19243 \begin_inset space ~
19247 \begin_inset space ~
19251 \begin_inset space ~
19256 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19257 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19265 \begin_layout Standard
19269 \begin_inset space ~
19273 \begin_inset space ~
19278 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19279 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19281 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19286 \begin_inset space ~
19291 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19292 with the image size is printed.
19295 \begin_layout Standard
19296 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19297 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19299 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19302 \begin_layout Standard
19304 \begin_inset Graphics
19305 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19313 \begin_layout Standard
19314 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19315 the image into a float, see section
19316 \begin_inset space ~
19320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19322 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19329 \begin_layout Subsection
19331 \begin_inset Index idx
19334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19343 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19350 \begin_layout Standard
19351 You can insert images in any known file format.
19352 But as we explained in section
19353 \begin_inset space ~
19357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19359 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19363 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19365 therefore uses the program
19369 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19370 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19371 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19372 \begin_inset space ~
19376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19378 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19385 \begin_layout Standard
19386 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19389 \begin_layout Description
19391 \begin_inset space ~
19394 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19395 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19396 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19400 Graphics Interchange Format
19401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19404 (GIF, file extension
19405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19417 \begin_inset Index idx
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19452 Portable Network Graphics
19453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19456 (PNG, file extension
19457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19469 \begin_inset Index idx
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19504 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19508 (JPG, file extension
19509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19533 \begin_inset Index idx
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19567 \begin_layout Description
19569 \begin_inset space ~
19572 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19574 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19575 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19576 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19577 \begin_inset Newline newline
19580 Scalable image formats can be
19581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19584 Scalable Vector Graphics
19585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19588 (SVG, file extension
19589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19601 \begin_inset Index idx
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19636 Encapsulated PostScript
19637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19640 (EPS, file extension
19641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19653 \begin_inset Index idx
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19688 Portable Document Format
19689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19692 (PDF, file extension
19693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19705 \begin_inset Index idx
19708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19723 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19724 result will not be scalable.
19725 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19731 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19739 \begin_layout Standard
19740 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19747 \begin_layout Subsection
19748 Grouping of Image Settings
19749 \begin_inset Index idx
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19753 Images ! Settings grouping
19761 \begin_layout Standard
19762 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19764 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19765 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19767 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19768 need to manually change each of them.
19772 \begin_layout Standard
19773 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19776 \begin_inset space ~
19780 \begin_inset space ~
19792 \begin_inset space ~
19796 \begin_inset space ~
19802 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19803 and checking the name of the desired group.
19806 \begin_layout Section
19808 \begin_inset Index idx
19811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19827 \begin_layout Standard
19828 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19831 arg "tabular-insert"
19836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19840 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19841 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19842 from the rest of the table.
19843 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19844 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19846 Here is an example table:
19849 \begin_layout Standard
19851 \begin_inset Tabular
19852 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19853 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19854 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19855 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19857 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20057 \begin_layout Subsection
20061 \begin_layout Standard
20062 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20065 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20069 This brings up the table dialog.
20070 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20071 cursor is placed currently.
20072 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20073 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20074 done on all of your selection.
20077 \begin_layout Standard
20078 In addition to the table dialog, the
20081 \begin_inset space ~
20086 helps you in setting table properties.
20087 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20090 \begin_layout Standard
20094 \begin_inset space ~
20099 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20100 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20101 current cell respectively.
20102 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20104 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20105 of text, see section
20106 \begin_inset space ~
20110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20112 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20119 \begin_layout Standard
20120 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20121 using the check box
20130 This will merge the cells to
20134 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20135 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20136 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20137 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20138 in the last row without the upper border:
20141 \begin_layout Standard
20143 \begin_inset Tabular
20144 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20145 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20147 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20148 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20149 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20160 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20280 \begin_layout Standard
20281 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20282 -arguments for the table.
20283 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20284 explained in the chapter
20291 \begin_inset space ~
20297 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20298 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20299 but are visible in the output.
20302 \begin_layout Standard
20303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20311 Most DVI-viewers are
20315 able to display rotations.
20323 \begin_layout Standard
20328 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20333 adds lines for all cell borders.
20336 \begin_layout Subsection
20338 \begin_inset Index idx
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 Tables ! Multi-page
20348 \begin_inset Index idx
20351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 \begin_layout Standard
20361 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20364 \begin_inset space ~
20368 \begin_inset space ~
20376 \begin_inset space ~
20381 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20382 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20385 \begin_layout Description
20390 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20391 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20392 Except for the first page, if
20395 \begin_inset space ~
20403 \begin_layout Description
20407 \begin_inset space ~
20412 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20413 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20416 \begin_layout Description
20421 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20422 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20423 except for the last page, if
20426 \begin_inset space ~
20434 \begin_layout Description
20438 \begin_inset space ~
20443 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20444 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20447 \begin_layout Description
20448 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20449 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20455 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20458 \begin_inset space ~
20466 \begin_layout Standard
20467 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20468 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20469 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20475 In this context, first means first in this order:
20478 \begin_inset space ~
20490 \begin_inset space ~
20495 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20498 \begin_layout Standard
20500 \begin_inset Tabular
20501 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20502 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20503 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20504 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20505 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20506 <row endfirsthead="true">
20507 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20513 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20518 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20527 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20537 <row endfirsthead="true">
20538 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20549 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20558 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20570 <row endhead="true">
20571 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 <row endhead="true">
20602 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20634 <row endfoot="true">
20635 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20655 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20686 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21627 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21636 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21645 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21656 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21687 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21718 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21749 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21780 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21811 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21935 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21966 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22152 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22183 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22493 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22616 <row endlastfoot="true">
22617 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22628 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22637 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 \begin_layout Subsection
22656 \begin_inset Index idx
22659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22668 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22675 \begin_layout Standard
22676 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22677 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22678 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22679 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22683 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22686 \begin_layout Standard
22687 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22688 for the column in the table dialog.
22689 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22690 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22694 \begin_layout Standard
22696 \begin_inset Tabular
22697 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22698 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22699 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22700 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22701 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22721 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22790 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22846 This is longer now.
22851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22903 This is longer now.
22908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22934 \begin_layout Standard
22935 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22936 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22941 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22942 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22948 Selection with the mouse or with
22952 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22953 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22954 the selection from outside the table.
22957 \begin_layout Section
22959 \begin_inset Index idx
22962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22978 \begin_layout Subsection
22982 \begin_layout Standard
22983 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22984 have a fixed location.
22986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22993 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23001 \begin_inset space ~
23006 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23007 too many notes on the current page.
23010 \begin_layout Standard
23011 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23012 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23013 and pages without text.
23014 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23015 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23016 Floats are therefore numbered.
23017 Referencing is described in section
23018 \begin_inset space ~
23022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23024 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23031 \begin_layout Standard
23032 To insert a float, use the menu
23034 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23038 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23039 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23041 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23042 \begin_inset Index idx
23045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23051 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23052 paragraph within the float.
23053 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23054 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23055 left-clicking on the box label.
23056 A closed float box looks like this:
23057 \begin_inset Graphics
23058 filename clipart/float.png
23063 – a gray button with a red label.
23066 \begin_layout Standard
23067 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23069 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23072 \begin_layout Subsection
23074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23076 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23081 \begin_inset Index idx
23084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23085 Floats ! Figure floats
23093 \begin_layout Standard
23095 \begin_inset space ~
23099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23101 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23105 was created using the menu
23107 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23108 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23114 arg "float-insert figure"
23118 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23127 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23131 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23132 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23134 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23136 \begin_inset space ~
23144 arg "layout-paragraph"
23150 \begin_layout Standard
23151 \begin_inset Float figure
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23158 \begin_inset Graphics
23159 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23169 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23174 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23178 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23191 \begin_layout Standard
23192 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23193 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23204 ) and refer to it using the menu
23206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23212 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23216 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23217 vague references like
23218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23225 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23226 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23236 For more about cross-references, see section
23237 \begin_inset space ~
23241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23243 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23250 \begin_layout Standard
23251 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23252 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23253 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23254 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23255 as described in section
23256 \begin_inset space ~
23260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23262 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23268 \begin_inset space ~
23272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23274 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23278 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23279 You can also set the images one below the other.
23281 \begin_inset space ~
23285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23287 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23294 reference "fig:Platypus"
23298 are the subfigures.
23301 \begin_layout Standard
23302 \begin_inset Float figure
23307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23308 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23312 \begin_inset Float figure
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23318 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23323 name "fig:Undefinable"
23335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 \begin_inset Graphics
23337 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23348 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23352 \begin_inset Float figure
23357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23358 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23363 name "fig:Platypus"
23375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 \begin_inset Graphics
23377 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23389 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23401 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23405 Two distorted images.
23418 \begin_layout Subsection
23420 \begin_inset Index idx
23423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23424 Floats ! Table floats
23432 \begin_layout Standard
23433 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23436 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23439 or the toolbar button
23442 arg "float-insert table"
23446 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23447 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23448 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23450 \begin_inset space ~
23454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23456 reference "tab:Table-float"
23463 \begin_layout Standard
23464 \begin_inset Float table
23469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23470 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23475 name "tab:Table-float"
23487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 \begin_inset Tabular
23490 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23491 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23492 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23493 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23494 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23621 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23642 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23645 \end{array}\right]$
23653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23666 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23687 \begin_layout Subsection
23689 \begin_inset Index idx
23692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23701 \begin_layout Standard
23703 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23704 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23705 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23707 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23715 \begin_inset space ~
23723 \begin_layout Section
23725 \begin_inset Index idx
23728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 \begin_layout Standard
23739 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23741 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23742 \begin_inset space \space{}
23749 \begin_layout Standard
23750 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23751 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23753 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23757 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23758 and its alignment within the page.
23761 \begin_layout Standard
23763 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23773 height_special "totalheight"
23778 backgroundcolor "none"
23781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 This is a minipage.
23785 The text is set in an italic style.
23788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23791 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23792 another formatting.
23800 \begin_layout Standard
23801 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23804 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23808 as described in section
23809 \begin_inset space ~
23813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23815 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23820 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23826 \begin_layout Standard
23827 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23837 height_special "totalheight"
23842 backgroundcolor "none"
23845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23847 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23853 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23857 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23867 height_special "totalheight"
23872 backgroundcolor "none"
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23877 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23885 \begin_layout Standard
23886 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23892 \begin_layout Standard
23893 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23895 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23902 \begin_inset space ~
23910 \begin_layout Chapter
23911 Mathematical Formulas
23912 \begin_inset Index idx
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23922 \begin_inset Index idx
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23956 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23963 \begin_layout Standard
23964 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23969 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23972 \begin_layout Section
23974 \begin_inset Index idx
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23986 \begin_layout Standard
23987 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24000 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24002 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24003 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24004 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24012 \begin_layout Standard
24013 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24017 \begin_inset space ~
24022 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24025 \begin_layout Standard
24026 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24027 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24030 \begin_layout Standard
24031 This is a line with an inline formula
24032 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24038 \begin_layout Standard
24039 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24040 paragraph, like this one:
24041 \begin_inset Formula
24048 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24051 \begin_layout Standard
24053 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24055 For example, typing
24056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24069 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24070 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24074 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24077 \begin_inset space ~
24085 \begin_layout Subsection
24086 Navigating in Formulas
24087 \begin_inset Index idx
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24099 \begin_layout Standard
24100 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24101 achieved with the arrow keys.
24103 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24104 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24109 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24110 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24114 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24118 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24121 \end{array}\right]$
24129 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24134 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24135 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24138 \begin_layout Standard
24143 , printed in this document as
24144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24148 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24155 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24156 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24157 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24162 For example, if you want
24163 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24171 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24181 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24185 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24190 , since in the latter case only the
24193 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24198 will be under the square root sign:
24199 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24205 \begin_layout Standard
24206 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24208 \begin_inset Formula
24210 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24219 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24220 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24223 \begin_layout Subsection
24227 \begin_layout Standard
24228 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24229 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24233 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24234 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24235 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24236 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24237 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24241 \begin_layout Subsection
24242 Exponents and Subscripts
24243 \begin_inset Index idx
24246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24253 \begin_inset Index idx
24256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24265 \begin_layout Standard
24266 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24269 arg "math-superscript"
24275 arg "math-subscript"
24278 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24280 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24283 , type in a formula
24286 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24296 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24302 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24306 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24312 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24318 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24327 , you have to use an extra
24331 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24332 For example, if you want
24333 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24339 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24345 Subscripts are similar: To get
24346 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24352 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24360 \begin_layout Subsection
24362 \begin_inset Index idx
24365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24374 \begin_layout Standard
24375 Create a fraction either with the command
24381 or by using the icon
24384 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24390 \begin_inset space ~
24396 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24397 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24398 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24403 To move back up, press
24408 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24409 \begin_inset Formula
24411 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24414 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24422 \begin_layout Subsection
24424 \begin_inset Index idx
24427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24436 \begin_layout Standard
24437 Roots can be created using the
24440 \begin_inset space ~
24448 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24454 arg "math-insert \\root"
24476 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24482 always produces a square root.
24485 \begin_layout Subsection
24486 Operators with Limits
24487 \begin_inset Index idx
24490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24497 \begin_inset Index idx
24500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24509 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24516 \begin_layout Standard
24518 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24522 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24525 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24526 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24527 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24528 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24529 The sum operator will automatically place its
24530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24537 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24539 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24543 \begin_inset Formula
24545 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24550 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24554 \begin_layout Standard
24555 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24557 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24558 behind the operator and using the menu
24560 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24561 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24563 \begin_inset space ~
24567 \begin_inset space ~
24581 \begin_layout Standard
24582 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24591 \begin_inset Index idx
24594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24601 \begin_inset Formula
24603 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24608 which will place the
24609 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24621 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24622 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24628 \begin_layout Standard
24629 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24636 Have a look at section
24637 \begin_inset space ~
24641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24643 reference "subsec:Functions"
24647 for an explanation of function macros.
24650 \begin_layout Subsection
24652 \begin_inset Index idx
24655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24664 \begin_layout Standard
24665 Most math symbols can be found in the
24668 \begin_inset space ~
24673 under one of several categories; including
24690 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24694 \begin_layout Standard
24695 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24696 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24697 don't have to use the
24700 \begin_inset space ~
24705 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24707 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24710 \begin_layout Subsection
24712 \begin_inset Index idx
24715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24724 \begin_layout Standard
24725 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24731 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24737 \begin_inset space ~
24745 arg "math-insert \\space"
24749 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24750 For example, the sequence
24755 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24758 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24760 \begin_inset Graphics
24761 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24766 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24767 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24768 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24769 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24770 , because they are negative
24772 Here are two examples:
24775 \begin_layout Standard
24785 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24791 \begin_layout Standard
24801 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24807 \begin_layout Subsection
24809 \begin_inset Index idx
24812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24821 name "subsec:Functions"
24828 \begin_layout Standard
24832 \begin_inset space ~
24837 contains under the button
24840 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24843 a number of function macros, such as
24844 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24848 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24856 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24863 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24864 avoid confusions, because
24865 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24869 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24875 \begin_layout Standard
24876 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24878 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24882 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24888 \begin_layout Standard
24889 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24890 are placed, as described in section
24891 \begin_inset space ~
24895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24897 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24904 \begin_layout Subsection
24906 \begin_inset Index idx
24909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24918 \begin_layout Standard
24919 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24921 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24922 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24923 commands, for example, to enter
24924 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24927 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24928 Our example is entered by typing
24933 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24940 \begin_inset space ~
24944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24946 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24950 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24953 \begin_layout Standard
24954 \begin_inset Float table
24959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24960 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24965 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24969 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 \begin_inset Tabular
24980 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24981 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24982 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24983 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24984 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25068 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25122 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25176 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25284 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25446 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25500 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25545 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25566 \begin_layout Standard
25567 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25570 \begin_inset space ~
25578 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25581 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25585 \begin_layout Section
25586 Brackets and Delimiters
25587 \begin_inset Index idx
25590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25597 \begin_inset Index idx
25600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25609 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25616 \begin_layout Standard
25617 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25619 For some purposes, using just the keys
25624 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25625 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25626 toolbar delimiter icon
25629 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25633 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25634 \begin_inset Formula
25636 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25644 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25645 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25649 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25652 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25658 \begin_inset Formula
25660 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25668 \begin_layout Standard
25669 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25670 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25674 \begin_layout Standard
25675 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25676 left side and right side.
25677 If you use the option
25680 \begin_inset space ~
25685 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25686 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25688 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25693 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25694 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25697 \begin_layout Standard
25698 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25699 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25700 is to go inside the brackets.
25701 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25706 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25707 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25708 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25712 arg "math-delim ( )"
25718 \begin_layout Section
25719 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25720 \begin_inset Index idx
25723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25730 \begin_inset Index idx
25733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25740 \begin_inset Index idx
25743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25744 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25752 \begin_layout Standard
25753 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25757 \begin_inset space ~
25765 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25769 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25770 Here is an example:
25771 \begin_inset Formula
25773 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25782 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25783 \begin_inset space ~
25787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25789 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25794 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25795 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25796 This alignment is set in the box
25801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25850 for every column as default.
25851 For example, the sequence
25852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25863 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25864 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25865 corresponds to the relevant column.
25866 The result will look like this:
25867 \begin_inset Formula
25870 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25871 column & has & has\,right\\
25872 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25881 \begin_layout Standard
25882 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25885 arg "newline-insert newline"
25888 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25889 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25891 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25894 or the math toolbar.
25897 \begin_layout Standard
25898 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25899 It can be created with the menu
25901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25902 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25904 \begin_inset space ~
25916 Here is an example:
25917 \begin_inset Formula
25931 \begin_layout Standard
25932 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25935 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25938 arg "newline-insert newline"
25942 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25947 arg "newline-insert newline"
25950 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25958 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25959 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25960 A new row is created by every further entry of
25963 arg "newline-insert newline"
25967 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25968 Here is an example:
25969 \begin_inset Formula
25971 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25972 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25977 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25978 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25979 \begin_inset Formula
25981 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25989 \begin_layout Standard
25990 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25997 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25998 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26001 reference "eq:asquared"
26006 The other types are described in section
26007 \begin_inset space ~
26011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26013 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26020 \begin_layout Section
26021 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26022 \begin_inset Index idx
26025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26026 Math ! Formula numbering
26032 \begin_inset Index idx
26035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26036 Math ! Referencing formulas
26042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26044 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26051 \begin_layout Standard
26052 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26054 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26055 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26057 \begin_inset space ~
26061 \begin_inset space ~
26069 arg "math-number-toggle"
26073 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26074 within parentheses.
26075 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26076 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26077 the document class.
26078 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26079 separated by a dot:
26080 \begin_inset Formula
26090 arg "math-number-toggle"
26093 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26094 You can only number displayed formulas.
26097 \begin_layout Standard
26098 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26100 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26101 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26103 \begin_inset space ~
26107 \begin_inset space ~
26115 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26118 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26119 \begin_inset Formula
26122 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26128 To number all lines use the shortcut
26131 arg "math-number-toggle"
26137 \begin_layout Standard
26138 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26141 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26142 A label is inserted with the menu
26144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26153 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26154 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26155 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26167 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26168 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26169 We inserted in the following example the label
26170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26177 in the second line:
26178 \begin_inset Formula
26180 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26181 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26186 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26187 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26188 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26192 \begin_inset space ~
26200 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26204 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26205 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26206 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26207 as the formula number:
26210 \begin_layout Standard
26211 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26214 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26221 \begin_layout Standard
26222 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26223 's cross-reference box are described in section
26224 \begin_inset space ~
26228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26230 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26235 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26243 \begin_layout Section
26244 User defined math macros
26245 \begin_inset Index idx
26248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26257 \begin_layout Standard
26259 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26260 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26261 Math macros are explained in section
26264 \begin_inset space ~
26276 \begin_layout Section
26280 \begin_layout Subsection
26282 \begin_inset Index idx
26285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26294 \begin_layout Standard
26295 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26296 To set a font in a formula, use the
26299 \begin_inset space ~
26307 arg "math-insert \\font"
26310 , or enter its command, listed in table
26311 \begin_inset space ~
26315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26317 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26324 \begin_layout Standard
26325 \begin_inset Float table
26330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26331 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26336 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26340 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26350 \begin_inset Tabular
26351 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26352 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26354 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26386 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26413 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26440 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26473 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26500 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26527 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26561 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26588 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26622 \begin_layout Standard
26623 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26631 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26647 \begin_layout Standard
26648 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26649 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26654 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26655 space when you need a space in the box.
26656 Here is an example where
26657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26668 denotes the set of numbers:
26669 \begin_inset Formula
26671 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26679 \begin_layout Standard
26680 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26681 You can, for example, put a character in
26690 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26694 \begin_inset Newline newline
26697 So it is better not to use this feature.
26700 \begin_layout Standard
26701 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26702 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26706 \begin_inset Newline newline
26709 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26715 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26716 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26722 \begin_layout Standard
26729 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26732 \begin_layout Standard
26733 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26735 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26736 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26738 \begin_inset space ~
26746 \begin_layout Subsection
26748 \begin_inset Index idx
26751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26760 \begin_layout Standard
26761 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26763 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26767 \begin_inset space ~
26771 \begin_inset space ~
26779 \begin_inset space ~
26787 arg "math-insert \\font"
26791 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26792 in black instead of blue.
26793 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26794 Here is an example:
26795 \begin_inset Formula
26798 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26799 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26808 \begin_layout Subsection
26810 \begin_inset Index idx
26813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26822 \begin_layout Standard
26823 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26824 automatically chosen in most situations.
26842 For most characters,
26850 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26851 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26856 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26857 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26858 thinks are appropriate.
26859 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26862 arg "math-insert \\style"
26866 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26867 For example, you can set
26868 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26871 , which is normally in
26880 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26884 The four styles are used in the following example:
26887 \begin_layout Standard
26888 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26892 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26896 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26900 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26906 \begin_layout Standard
26907 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26908 is set in a particular size with the menu
26910 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26912 \begin_inset space ~
26917 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26918 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26919 will be adjusted to correspond.
26920 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26931 \begin_layout Standard
26935 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26941 \begin_layout Section
26942 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26944 \begin_inset Index idx
26947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26954 \begin_inset Index idx
26957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26966 \begin_layout Standard
26968 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26969 that are in common use.
26972 \begin_layout Subsection
26973 Enabling AMS-Support
26976 \begin_layout Standard
26977 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26978 the document by selecting the checkbox
26981 \begin_inset space ~
26985 \begin_inset space ~
26989 \begin_inset space ~
26996 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27000 \begin_inset Index idx
27003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27004 Document ! Settings
27012 \begin_inset space ~
27018 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27019 -errors in formulas,
27020 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27023 \begin_layout Subsection
27025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27027 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27032 \begin_inset Index idx
27035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27036 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27044 \begin_layout Standard
27045 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27046 provides a selection of different formula types.
27048 allows you to choose between
27069 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27070 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27077 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27080 \begin_layout Chapter
27084 \begin_layout Section
27086 \begin_inset Index idx
27089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27098 name "sec:Cross-References"
27105 \begin_layout Standard
27106 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27107 's strengths is cross-references.
27108 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27110 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27111 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27112 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27115 \begin_layout Enumerate
27119 \begin_layout Enumerate
27120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27122 name "enu:Second-item"
27129 \begin_layout Enumerate
27133 \begin_layout Standard
27134 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27136 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27139 or by pressing the toolbar button
27146 A gray label box like this:
27147 \begin_inset Graphics
27148 filename clipart/label.png
27152 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27154 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27189 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27190 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27206 \begin_layout Standard
27207 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27212 or the toolbar button
27215 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27219 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27220 \begin_inset Graphics
27221 filename clipart/reference.png
27225 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27227 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27240 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27244 \begin_layout Standard
27245 As an alternative to
27247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27250 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27255 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27256 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27258 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27270 \begin_layout Standard
27271 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27272 \begin_inset space ~
27276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27278 reference "enu:Second-item"
27285 \begin_layout Standard
27286 It is recommended to use a protected space
27290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27291 described in section
27292 \begin_inset space ~
27296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27298 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27307 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27308 line breaks between them.
27311 \begin_layout Standard
27312 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27315 \begin_layout Description
27316 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27319 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27326 \begin_layout Description
27327 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27328 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27340 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27347 \begin_layout Description
27348 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27349 \begin_inset space ~
27353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27354 LatexCommand pageref
27355 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27362 \begin_layout Description
27364 \begin_inset space ~
27368 \begin_inset space ~
27371 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27373 LatexCommand vpageref
27374 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27379 \begin_inset Newline newline
27382 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27383 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27384 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27385 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27386 it prints “on the next page”.
27387 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27390 \begin_layout Description
27392 \begin_inset space ~
27396 \begin_inset space ~
27400 \begin_inset space ~
27403 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27406 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27411 \begin_inset Newline newline
27414 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27420 ; otherwise it behaves like
27424 \begin_inset space ~
27428 \begin_inset space ~
27437 \begin_layout Description
27439 \begin_inset space ~
27442 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27443 \begin_inset Newline newline
27447 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27455 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27465 \begin_inset Index idx
27468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27470 -packages ! prettyref
27476 \begin_inset Index idx
27479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27481 -packages ! refstyle
27492 \begin_inset Newline newline
27495 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27496 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27499 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27504 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27512 is the default and preferred because
27516 supports only English documents.
27517 The format is specified by using the command
27529 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27530 preamble of the document.
27531 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27549 \begin_inset Newline newline
27556 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27561 \begin_inset Newline newline
27572 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27573 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27575 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27576 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27581 , you might do so as follows:
27582 \begin_inset Newline newline
27589 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27594 \begin_inset Newline newline
27597 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27598 the package documentation
27599 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27601 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27607 \begin_inset Newline newline
27618 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27625 \begin_layout Description
27627 \begin_inset space ~
27630 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27632 LatexCommand nameref
27633 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27640 \begin_layout Description
27642 \begin_inset space ~
27645 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27646 label for the reference:
27647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27648 LatexCommand labelonly
27649 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27654 \begin_inset Newline newline
27657 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27658 Code, if you want to issue a command
27659 that \SpecialChar LyX
27665 , then you may want to use the
27668 \begin_inset space ~
27673 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27683 This is the form needed for e.
27684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27688 \begin_inset space \space{}
27695 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27696 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27698 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27702 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27706 \begin_layout Standard
27707 You can only use the style
27711 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27715 is always possible.
27718 \begin_layout Standard
27719 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27720 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27722 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27723 \begin_inset space ~
27727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27729 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27736 \begin_layout Standard
27737 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27741 \begin_inset space ~
27745 \begin_inset space ~
27750 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27751 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27754 \begin_inset space ~
27759 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27760 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27763 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27769 \begin_layout Standard
27770 You can change labels at any time.
27771 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27772 do not need to think about this.
27775 \begin_layout Standard
27776 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27778 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27782 \begin_layout Standard
27783 References are described in detail in the section
27784 \begin_inset space ~
27794 \begin_inset space ~
27802 \begin_layout Section
27803 Table of Contents and other Listings
27804 \begin_inset Index idx
27807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27814 \begin_inset Index idx
27817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27818 Navigating ! Outline
27824 \begin_inset Index idx
27827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27843 \begin_layout Subsection
27845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27847 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27854 \begin_layout Standard
27855 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27858 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27860 \begin_inset space ~
27864 \begin_inset space ~
27870 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27872 If you click on it, the
27876 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27877 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27878 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27880 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27882 \begin_inset space ~
27887 that is described in section
27888 \begin_inset space ~
27892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27894 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27901 \begin_layout Standard
27902 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27903 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27905 \begin_inset space ~
27909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27911 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27915 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27917 \begin_inset space ~
27921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27923 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27927 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27929 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27932 \begin_layout Subsection
27933 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27936 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27943 \begin_layout Standard
27944 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27946 You can insert them via the
27948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27952 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27955 \begin_layout Section
27956 URLs and Hyperlinks
27957 \begin_inset Index idx
27960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27967 \begin_inset Index idx
27970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27979 \begin_layout Subsection
27981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27990 \begin_layout Standard
27991 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27993 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27999 \begin_layout Standard
28000 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28002 \begin_inset Flex URL
28005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28015 \begin_layout Standard
28016 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28022 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28026 \begin_layout Standard
28027 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28035 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28044 \begin_layout Subsection
28046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28048 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28055 \begin_layout Standard
28056 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28061 or with the toolbar button
28068 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28077 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28078 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28079 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28081 name "LyX's homepage"
28082 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28087 , an Email address like this:
28088 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28090 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28091 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28097 , or a link to a file.
28100 \begin_layout Standard
28101 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28114 to the link target.
28117 \begin_layout Standard
28118 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28119 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28120 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28121 the text style dialog.
28122 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28126 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28128 name "LyX's homepage"
28129 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28137 \begin_layout Standard
28138 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28142 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28145 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28149 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28151 \begin_inset Newline newline
28159 \begin_inset Newline newline
28166 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28169 \begin_layout Section
28171 \begin_inset Index idx
28174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28183 name "sec:Appendices"
28190 \begin_layout Standard
28191 Appendices are created with the menu
28193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28195 \begin_inset space ~
28199 \begin_inset space ~
28205 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28206 as the appendix part of the book.
28207 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28210 \begin_layout Standard
28211 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28212 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28213 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28214 and the subsection number.
28215 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28219 \begin_layout Standard
28221 \begin_inset space ~
28225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28227 reference "chap:Credits"
28232 \begin_inset space ~
28236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28238 reference "subsec:Export"
28245 \begin_layout Section
28247 \begin_inset Index idx
28250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28259 name "sec:Bibliography"
28266 \begin_layout Standard
28267 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28269 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28270 \begin_inset space ~
28274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28276 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28283 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28288 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28289 \begin_inset space ~
28293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28295 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28300 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28302 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28304 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28307 author-year citations,
28308 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28309 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28312 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28314 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28315 should seriously consider
28322 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28324 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28327 a bibliography database.
28328 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28332 \begin_layout Standard
28334 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28335 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28336 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28340 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28341 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28342 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28343 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28344 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28349 \begin_layout Subsection
28350 The Bibliography Environment
28351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28353 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28360 \begin_layout Standard
28365 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28367 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28376 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28379 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28380 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28381 of ASCII characters only.
28384 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28394 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28395 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28399 \begin_layout Standard
28400 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28405 or the toolbar button
28408 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28412 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28413 containing the available citations.
28414 Select one or more keys from the list and
28424 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28425 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28429 \begin_layout Standard
28430 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28431 entry with surrounding brackets.
28436 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28437 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28449 \begin_layout Standard
28453 Companion Second Edition
28456 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28458 key "latexcompanion"
28466 \begin_layout Standard
28467 The \SpecialChar LyX
28468 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28469 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28477 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28481 \begin_layout Standard
28483 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28484 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28489 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28501 Author A and Author B(Year)
28502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28509 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28511 Then, if you select
28517 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28521 \begin_inset Index idx
28524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28526 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28527 Document ! Settings
28534 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28540 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28547 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28552 \begin_layout Standard
28553 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28556 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28558 \begin_inset space ~
28566 arg "layout-paragraph"
28570 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28573 \begin_layout Subsection
28574 Bibliography databases
28575 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28576 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28580 \begin_inset Index idx
28583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28584 Bibliography ! Databases
28590 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28592 \begin_inset Index idx
28595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28596 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28607 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28614 \begin_layout Standard
28615 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28616 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28618 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28621 in different documents.
28625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28626 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28628 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28629 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28634 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28636 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28637 your working field in a database.
28638 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28639 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28640 list for that document.
28641 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28645 \begin_layout Standard
28646 The database is a text file with the file extension
28647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28658 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28659 The format is explained in
28660 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28667 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28669 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28671 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28677 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28678 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28679 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28681 \begin_inset Flex URL
28684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28686 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28692 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28696 \begin_layout Standard
28698 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28700 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28701 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28702 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28704 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28705 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28706 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28708 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28717 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28718 (although it has been significantly
28719 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28726 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28731 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28732 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28733 might conversely fail to correctly
28734 handle databases that use specific
28745 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28749 \begin_layout Standard
28751 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28752 Both approaches are described in turn.
28755 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28757 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28758 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28760 \begin_inset Index idx
28763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28765 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28766 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28777 \begin_layout Standard
28779 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28781 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28785 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28786 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28796 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28798 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28802 \begin_inset space ~
28808 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28809 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28810 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28811 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28821 Add bibliography to TOC
28823 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28828 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28829 in the document or just the cited references.
28832 \begin_layout Standard
28834 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28835 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28838 style file is a text file with the file extension
28839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28850 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28851 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28852 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28853 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28855 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28861 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28862 \begin_inset Newline newline
28866 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28868 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28879 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
28880 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28885 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28891 \begin_layout Standard
28892 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28893 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
28897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28899 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
28901 \begin_inset Index idx
28904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28906 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
28907 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28915 \begin_layout Standard
28917 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
28918 Accessing a database via
28922 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28930 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28932 \begin_inset space ~
28938 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28939 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28941 you cannot select a
28945 file (we will explain later, why).
28946 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28949 Add bibliography to TOC
28951 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28956 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28957 in the document or just the cited references.
28960 \begin_layout Standard
28962 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
28967 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
28969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28980 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
28982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28993 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
28994 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
28995 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
28996 bibliography style.
28999 \begin_layout Standard
29001 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
29006 styles are not set in the
29009 \begin_inset space ~
29020 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29021 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29025 However, in the former dialog (in the
29029 field which is only visible if you use
29033 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
29034 (for instance concerning its heading).
29035 These options are detailed in the
29040 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29052 \begin_layout Standard
29054 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
29055 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29056 \begin_inset space ~
29060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29062 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29074 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
29075 Bibliography Processors
29078 \begin_layout Standard
29079 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29081 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
29082 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
29083 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
29088 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
29090 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
29094 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
29100 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
29101 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
29105 \begin_layout Standard
29107 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
29108 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
29110 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29111 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
29112 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29117 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
29118 do this on a general level in
29120 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29121 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29122 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29125 , or for individual documents
29126 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
29127 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
29136 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29137 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29139 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
29144 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29145 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29146 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29152 The following variants are
29153 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
29155 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
29156 available by default
29161 \begin_layout Description
29163 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
29164 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
29168 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29176 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
29177 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
29178 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
29179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29183 \begin_inset space \space{}
29190 ), only with the package
29193 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
29196 and many specific features
29203 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
29204 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
29206 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
29211 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29220 \begin_layout Description
29221 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29222 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29223 with all bibliography packages,
29224 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
29226 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
29230 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
29231 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
29232 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
29234 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
29240 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
29243 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
29248 \begin_layout Description
29249 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29250 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
29251 (but no Unicode support)
29253 , larger memory than
29257 , works with all bibliography packages
29258 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
29259 , although more complex
29263 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29267 features are supported.
29270 \begin_layout Standard
29272 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
29274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29281 bibliography processor set in
29283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29284 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29295 bibliography processor in
29297 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29298 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29299 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29302 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29303 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29312 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29313 -based bibliography styles).
29314 This should suit most needs.
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29321 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29322 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29323 By default, this is
29331 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29332 You can adjust it in
29334 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29335 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29336 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29344 \begin_layout Standard
29346 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29347 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29349 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29350 Selected bibliography processors
29352 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29353 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29354 specification of the variants
29355 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29359 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29361 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29365 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29368 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29370 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29376 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29378 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29386 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29398 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29402 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29404 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29410 \begin_layout Standard
29412 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29414 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29417 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29418 When you select the option
29420 Sectioned bibliography
29424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29425 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29428 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29432 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29434 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29438 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29442 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29445 are explained in detail in section
29447 Customizing Bibliographies
29451 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29453 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054457
29460 Additional Features
29465 \begin_layout Standard
29467 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29468 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29469 the two methods of creating them.
29470 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29471 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29472 We used the style file
29476 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29481 \begin_layout Subsection
29483 \begin_inset Index idx
29486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29487 Bibliography ! Citation format
29493 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29495 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29497 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29506 \begin_layout Standard
29508 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29509 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29514 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29523 ) or author-year citations (as
29524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29533 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29537 \begin_layout Standard
29539 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29540 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29543 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29547 \begin_inset Index idx
29550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29552 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29553 Document ! Settings
29560 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29563 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29564 bibliography approach.
29567 \begin_layout Standard
29569 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29574 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29579 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29583 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29590 \begin_layout Standard
29592 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29593 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29601 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29609 Currently, the following options are available:
29612 \begin_layout Itemize
29614 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29621 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29625 \begin_layout Itemize
29627 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29636 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29638 Biblatex citation style
29642 Biblatex bibliography style
29645 Many different style variants are supported.
29650 package can be entered in the
29657 \begin_layout Itemize
29659 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29662 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29672 natbib compatibility mode
29673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29677 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29682 (see below) or want to emulate
29686 behavior very closely.
29691 , this option has some additional styles.
29692 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29697 styles are also supported by this variant.
29700 \begin_layout Itemize
29702 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29711 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29714 \begin_layout Itemize
29716 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29725 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29730 \begin_layout Standard
29732 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29741 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29743 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29748 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29750 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29751 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29768 , a suitable style is proposed).
29773 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29777 \begin_layout Standard
29779 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29780 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29782 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29784 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29787 n the citation reference dialog
29788 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29789 you can set a special citation format
29793 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29794 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29795 a name prefix such as
29796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29811 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29815 e., use or don't use
29816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29825 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29826 For this feature you need to enable the option
29832 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29836 \begin_inset Index idx
29839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29840 Document ! Settings
29850 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29851 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29852 style files as explained in
29853 the previous section.
29858 \begin_layout Standard
29860 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
29861 In the citation dialog,
29862 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
29864 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
29867 ou can also set text to appear
29868 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
29871 after a citation reference,
29872 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
29873 in the citation reference window
29874 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
29876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29880 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29898 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
29900 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
29903 example where the text
29904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29908 \begin_inset space ~
29912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29915 appears after the reference:
29918 \begin_layout Quote
29920 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29923 key "latexcompanion"
29929 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
29933 \begin_layout Standard
29935 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054733
29936 All styles except for
29940 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
29941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29949 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29953 \begin_layout Standard
29955 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998495
29956 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29957 That is to say, if you refer to multiple references at one, the prenote
29958 will precede the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the
29964 styles allow for adding pre- and postnotes to any individual reference
29965 in a multi-citation (so-called
29966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29969 qualified citation lists
29970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29976 If you use such a style, and if the current reference includes multiple
29978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29985 window will display three columns:
29986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30010 If you double-click on an item's
30011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30026 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30031 General text before
30032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30043 input widgets, you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30048 \begin_layout Section
30050 \begin_inset Index idx
30053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30069 \begin_layout Standard
30070 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30074 \begin_inset space ~
30079 or the toolbar button
30086 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30087 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30088 by \SpecialChar LyX
30089 as the index entry.
30092 \begin_layout Standard
30093 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30096 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30098 \begin_inset space ~
30104 A light blue box labeled
30105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30116 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30117 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30121 \begin_layout Standard
30122 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30123 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30124 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30125 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30127 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30129 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30137 \begin_layout Subsection
30138 Grouping Index Entries
30139 \begin_inset Index idx
30142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30151 \begin_layout Standard
30152 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30154 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30155 lists under the entry
30156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30164 First we create the entry
30165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30173 \begin_inset space ~
30177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30179 reference "subsec:Lists"
30184 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30185 \begin_inset space ~
30189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30191 reference "sec:Itemize"
30195 , we insert the command
30198 \begin_layout Standard
30204 \begin_layout Standard
30208 \begin_layout Standard
30214 \begin_layout Standard
30215 for the enumerated list in section
30216 \begin_inset space ~
30220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30222 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30229 \begin_layout Standard
30230 The exclamation mark
30231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30238 marks the grouping levels.
30239 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30240 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30241 If we don't have an index entry for
30242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30249 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30252 \begin_layout Subsection
30254 \begin_inset Index idx
30257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30258 Index ! Page ranges
30266 \begin_layout Standard
30267 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30269 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30270 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30271 an index entry in section
30272 \begin_inset space ~
30276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30278 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30285 \begin_layout Standard
30288 Paragraph environments|(
30291 \begin_layout Standard
30292 and another entry at the end of section
30293 \begin_inset space ~
30297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30299 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30306 \begin_layout Standard
30309 Paragraph environments|)
30312 \begin_layout Standard
30314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30337 respectively start and end the index range.
30338 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30339 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30340 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30341 An example is the index entry
30342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30345 Document ! Settings
30346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30352 \begin_layout Subsection
30354 \begin_inset Index idx
30357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30358 Index ! Cross referencing
30366 \begin_layout Standard
30367 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30368 We referred for example in the index entry
30369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30377 \begin_inset space ~
30381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30383 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30387 ) to the index entry
30388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30395 in the same section using the entry
30398 \begin_layout Standard
30401 GIF|see{Image formats}
30404 \begin_layout Standard
30405 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30407 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30408 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30411 \begin_layout Subsection
30413 \begin_inset Index idx
30416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30417 Index ! Entry order
30425 \begin_layout Standard
30426 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30427 follow the rules for the index order.
30428 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30434 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30436 \begin_inset space ~
30440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30442 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30451 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30452 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30477 \begin_inset Index idx
30480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30481 Dummy entries ! maïs
30487 \begin_inset Index idx
30490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30491 Dummy entries ! maître
30497 \begin_inset Index idx
30500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30501 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30506 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30507 maïs, maison, maître.
30508 To achieve this, we use the command
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30514 previous entry@current entry
30517 \begin_layout Standard
30518 In our case we want to have
30519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30534 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30537 \begin_layout Standard
30543 \begin_layout Standard
30544 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30545 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30547 See the next subsection for an example.
30550 \begin_layout Standard
30551 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30557 \begin_layout Standard
30558 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30563 to generate the index (see section
30564 \begin_inset space ~
30568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30570 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30579 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30580 -package aeguill in section
30581 \begin_inset space ~
30585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30587 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30591 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30592 -packages although all these index
30593 commands start with
30594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30607 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30612 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30615 \begin_layout Standard
30627 \begin_layout Standard
30639 \begin_layout Subsection
30641 \begin_inset Index idx
30644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30645 Index ! Entry layout
30653 \begin_layout Standard
30654 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30655 \begin_inset Index idx
30658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30661 This is an italic dummy entry
30666 You can also format the page number using the character
30667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30674 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30675 -command without a backslash.
30676 We can write for example
30679 \begin_layout Standard
30682 italic page number:|textit
30685 \begin_layout Standard
30686 to get the page number in italic.
30687 \begin_inset Index idx
30690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30691 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30696 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30697 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30715 \begin_inset space ~
30721 Have a look at section
30722 \begin_inset space ~
30726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30728 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30732 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30736 \begin_layout Standard
30737 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30745 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30749 to generate the index, see section
30750 \begin_inset space ~
30754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30756 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30765 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30770 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30771 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30774 key "latexcompanion"
30787 \begin_layout Standard
30788 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30790 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30791 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30792 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30793 If so, put the following in the preamble
30796 \begin_layout Standard
30808 \begin_layout Standard
30812 \begin_layout Standard
30818 \begin_layout Standard
30819 in the index entry.
30820 \begin_inset Index idx
30823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30824 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30829 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30830 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30831 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30834 \begin_layout Standard
30835 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30836 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30837 a bold font for all index entries.
30838 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30850 documentation for details,
30851 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30853 key "makeindex,xindy"
30861 \begin_layout Subsection
30863 \begin_inset Index idx
30866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30875 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30882 \begin_layout Standard
30883 If the index generation program
30887 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30888 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30892 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30893 distribution, is used.
30897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30902 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30903 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30904 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30905 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30906 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30916 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30918 dialog, see section
30919 \begin_inset space ~
30923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30925 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30930 The available options are listed and explained in
30931 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30933 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30939 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30943 \begin_layout Standard
30944 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30945 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30949 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30953 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30954 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30957 \begin_layout Subsection
30961 \begin_layout Standard
30962 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30963 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30971 next to the standard index.
30973 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30974 that add this feature.
30981 \begin_inset Index idx
30984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30986 -packages ! splitidx
30991 package to generate multiple indexes.
30992 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30998 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31000 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31008 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31009 style, but it also includes
31010 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31011 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31019 \begin_layout Standard
31020 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31021 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31024 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31027 and select the option
31029 Use multiple Indexes
31036 already contains the standard index
31037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31045 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31046 also appear as a heading) to the
31050 input field and press the
31055 The new index now also appears in the list.
31056 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31057 label color to the new index.
31060 \begin_layout Standard
31061 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31064 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31071 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31072 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31073 are additional features:
31076 \begin_layout Itemize
31077 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31078 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31081 \begin_layout Itemize
31082 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31083 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31091 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31092 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31093 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31094 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31097 \begin_layout Section
31098 Nomenclature/Glossary
31099 \begin_inset Index idx
31102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31109 \begin_inset Index idx
31112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31143 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31150 \begin_layout Standard
31151 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31152 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31153 called nomenclature or glossary.
31156 \begin_layout Standard
31157 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31164 \begin_inset Index idx
31167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31169 -packages ! nomencl
31175 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31177 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31184 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31188 \begin_layout Standard
31189 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31190 and then use the menu
31192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31198 \begin_inset space ~
31203 or the toolbar button
31206 arg "nomencl-insert"
31211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31222 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31225 \begin_layout Standard
31226 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31227 The first is the term or
31231 that you wish to define.
31236 of the term or symbol.
31239 \begin_layout Standard
31240 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31248 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31249 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31257 \begin_layout Subsection
31258 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31259 \begin_inset Index idx
31262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31263 Nomenclature ! Layout
31271 \begin_layout Standard
31272 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31276 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31283 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31291 \begin_inset Newline newline
31299 \begin_inset Newline newline
31305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31312 character starts/ends the formula.
31313 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31314 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31326 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31336 \begin_layout Standard
31337 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31338 -syntax is given in section
31339 \begin_inset space ~
31343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31345 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31352 \begin_layout Standard
31356 \begin_inset space ~
31361 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31363 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31368 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31375 in this document is:
31376 \begin_inset Newline newline
31381 dummy entry for the character
31386 \begin_inset Newline newline
31398 \begin_inset space ~
31408 font use the command
31437 \begin_layout Standard
31438 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31443 \begin_inset space \space{}
31447 \begin_inset Newline newline
31463 \begin_inset Newline newline
31466 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31467 This command will make the font of all symbols
31474 \begin_inset space ~
31482 \begin_layout Standard
31483 If the characters |
31484 \begin_inset space \space{}
31488 \begin_inset space \space{}
31492 \begin_inset space \space{}
31496 \begin_inset space \space{}
31500 \begin_inset space \space{}
31503 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31504 a quote character in front of them.
31505 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31506 LatexCommand nomenclature
31507 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31508 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31516 \begin_layout Subsection
31517 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31518 \begin_inset Index idx
31521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31522 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31530 \begin_layout Standard
31531 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31532 -code of the symbol
31534 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31536 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31539 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31540 LatexCommand nomenclature
31542 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31550 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31554 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31555 LatexCommand nomenclature
31558 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31564 They will be sorted by
31565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31591 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31594 will be sorted before the
31598 since the character
31599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31606 is considered in sorting.
31609 \begin_layout Standard
31610 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31613 \begin_inset space ~
31618 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31619 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31621 For the example given, you can insert
31625 in this field for the
31626 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31633 will be located before
31634 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31640 \begin_layout Standard
31641 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31646 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31656 \begin_layout Subsection
31657 Nomenclature Options
31658 \begin_inset Index idx
31661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31662 Nomenclature ! Options
31670 \begin_layout Standard
31675 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31676 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31679 \begin_layout Description
31680 refeq Appends the phrase
31681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31696 to every nomenclature entry, where
31702 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31705 \begin_layout Description
31706 refpage Appends the phrase
31707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31722 to every nomenclature entry, where
31728 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31731 \begin_layout Description
31732 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31735 \begin_layout Standard
31736 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31737 class options list in the
31739 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31743 In this document the options
31750 \begin_layout Standard
31751 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31757 \begin_layout Standard
31758 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31759 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31764 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31767 \begin_layout Description
31777 \begin_layout Description
31780 nomrefpage Like the
31787 \begin_layout Description
31790 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31799 \begin_layout Description
31803 \begin_inset space ~
31809 \begin_inset space ~
31814 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31817 \begin_layout Standard
31819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31826 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31827 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31831 \begin_layout Standard
31839 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31842 \begin_inset Newline newline
31849 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31854 \begin_inset Newline newline
31858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31873 by their translation.
31876 \begin_layout Subsection
31877 Printing the Nomenclature
31878 \begin_inset Index idx
31881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31882 Nomenclature ! Printing
31890 \begin_layout Standard
31891 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31894 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31910 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31911 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31912 You can choose between these settings:
31915 \begin_layout Description
31916 Default a space of 1
31917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31923 \begin_layout Description
31925 \begin_inset space ~
31929 \begin_inset space ~
31932 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31935 \begin_layout Description
31936 Custom custom space
31939 \begin_layout Standard
31940 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31949 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31957 For example, in order to change the name to
31961 , add the following line to the preamble:
31964 \begin_layout Standard
31972 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31975 \begin_layout Subsection
31976 Nomenclature Program
31977 \begin_inset Index idx
31980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31981 Nomenclature ! Program
31987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31989 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31996 \begin_layout Standard
32002 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32003 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32005 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32010 by adding options, see section
32011 \begin_inset space ~
32015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32017 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32022 The available options are listed and explained in
32023 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32025 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32033 \begin_layout Section
32035 \begin_inset Index idx
32038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32045 \begin_inset Index idx
32048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32049 Document ! Branches
32055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32057 name "sec:Branches"
32064 \begin_layout Standard
32065 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32066 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32067 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32068 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32071 \begin_layout Standard
32072 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32073 allows you to put text into branches.
32074 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32075 To create a branch, either select the menu
32077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32078 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32081 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32090 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32091 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32092 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32093 and whether the name of the branch should
32094 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32095 (see below for an example).
32096 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32097 to the name of the other) and to add
32098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32110 \begin_inset space ~
32113 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32114 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32117 \begin_layout Standard
32118 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32119 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32124 where you can choose a branch.
32125 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32129 \begin_layout Standard
32130 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32131 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32134 \begin_layout Standard
32135 \begin_inset Branch Question
32139 \begin_layout Standard
32140 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32148 \begin_layout Standard
32149 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32153 \begin_layout Standard
32154 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32162 \begin_layout Standard
32169 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32170 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32173 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32174 Consider for example a file
32175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32182 which has the above branches.
32184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32191 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32215 branch were inactive,
32216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32231 branch was active, likewise
32232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32247 branch was active, and
32248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32251 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32255 if both branches were active.
32256 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32257 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
32261 \begin_layout Standard
32263 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32264 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
32265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32272 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
32278 \begin_inset Branch Question
32282 \begin_layout Standard
32284 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
32285 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
32293 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32294 To control whether a particular inset is
32295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32302 , right-click on the inset button and choose
32303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32309 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32315 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
32319 \begin_layout Standard
32320 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32326 \begin_layout Standard
32327 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32328 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32329 definitions for each branch.
32330 For example you can define for the question branch
32334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32335 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32336 -syntax, see section
32337 \begin_inset space ~
32341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32343 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32355 \begin_layout Standard
32365 \begin_layout Standard
32375 \begin_layout Standard
32376 and for the answer branch
32379 \begin_layout Standard
32389 \begin_layout Standard
32399 \begin_layout Standard
32400 \begin_inset Branch Question
32404 \begin_layout Standard
32408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32436 \begin_layout Standard
32437 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32441 \begin_layout Standard
32445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32473 \begin_layout Standard
32474 Now it is possible to use the
32478 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32485 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32488 commands to obtain conditional output.
32489 Here is an example formula where only the
32496 \begin_inset Formula
32498 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32506 \begin_layout Standard
32507 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32515 \begin_layout Standard
32516 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32522 \begin_inset space \space{}
32525 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32527 For this advanced usage, see the
32533 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32538 \begin_layout Section
32540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32542 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32547 \begin_inset Index idx
32550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32559 \begin_layout Standard
32562 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32563 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32566 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32568 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32574 \begin_inset Index idx
32577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32579 -packages ! hyperref
32584 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32585 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32586 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32587 part of the document.
32591 \begin_layout Standard
32592 The header information in the dialog tab
32596 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32597 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32598 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32599 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32603 \begin_inset space ~
32607 \begin_inset space ~
32612 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32613 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32614 and author entries.
32618 \begin_inset space ~
32622 \begin_inset space ~
32626 \begin_inset space ~
32631 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32634 \begin_layout Standard
32635 You can specify in the dialog tab
32639 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32644 \begin_inset space ~
32648 \begin_inset space ~
32652 \begin_inset space ~
32657 option allows long links to be split;
32660 \begin_inset space ~
32664 \begin_inset space ~
32668 \begin_inset space ~
32676 \begin_inset space ~
32681 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32684 \begin_inset space ~
32689 colors the different links.
32690 The default colors are:
32693 \begin_layout Labeling
32694 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32699 for hyperlinks and URLs
32702 \begin_layout Labeling
32703 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32711 \begin_layout Labeling
32712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32720 \begin_layout Standard
32721 but you can change these in the field
32726 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32729 \begin_layout Standard
32732 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32735 \begin_layout Standard
32740 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32741 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32742 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32745 \begin_layout Standard
32750 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32751 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32752 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32762 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32763 when opening the PDF.
32765 \begin_inset space ~
32768 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32769 \begin_inset space ~
32772 1 will only display the sections.
32775 \begin_layout Standard
32776 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32777 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32783 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32784 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32794 \begin_layout Section
32796 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32800 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32807 \begin_layout Subsection
32810 \begin_inset Index idx
32813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32823 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32830 \begin_layout Standard
32831 As \SpecialChar LyX
32832 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32833 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32834 commands and constructs,
32837 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32838 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32839 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32840 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32841 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32842 cannot support all packages and
32846 \begin_layout Standard
32847 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32848 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32849 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32853 Code box is created by the menu
32855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32857 \begin_inset space ~
32862 or by the toolbar button
32875 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32883 \begin_layout Standard
32884 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32886 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32888 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32893 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32898 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32905 , you can write the command part
32911 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32912 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32916 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32917 Code box behind the word.
32918 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32919 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32923 \begin_layout Standard
32924 \begin_inset Graphics
32925 filename clipart/ERT.png
32933 \begin_layout Standard
32937 \begin_layout Standard
32938 This is a line with a
32942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32965 \begin_layout Standard
32966 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32974 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32975 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32976 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32977 know that the command is finished.
32985 \begin_layout Subsection
32986 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32988 \begin_inset Argument 1
32991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32992 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32999 \begin_inset Index idx
33002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33012 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33019 \begin_layout Standard
33020 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33021 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33022 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33023 uses in the background.
33024 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33025 is based on commands, you can
33026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33034 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33035 any time if you know the right commands.
33036 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33037 is the end of the day.
33038 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33039 all caption labels bold.
33040 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33042 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33046 \begin_layout Standard
33047 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33049 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33051 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33054 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33064 \begin_layout Standard
33065 As result you find that the package
33070 \begin_inset Index idx
33073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33075 -packages ! caption
33081 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33086 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33090 \begin_inset space ~
33098 \begin_layout Standard
33103 usepackage[options]{package name}
33106 \begin_layout Standard
33107 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33108 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33109 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33110 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33113 \begin_layout Standard
33114 In your case the package name is
33119 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33124 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33125 So you add the command
33128 \begin_layout Standard
33133 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33136 \begin_layout Standard
33137 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33142 For more commands provided by the
33146 package, have a look at its documentation,
33147 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33162 \begin_layout Standard
33163 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33165 For example if you use a
33169 class, you don't need the package
33173 , you can instead write
33176 \begin_layout Standard
33181 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33186 \begin_layout Standard
33187 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33188 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33189 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33196 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33199 \begin_layout Standard
33200 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33201 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33203 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33204 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33205 Code box as described in the previous
33209 \begin_layout Standard
33210 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33211 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33214 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33216 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33224 \begin_layout Standard
33225 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33231 \begin_layout Standard
33235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33245 \begin_inset Note Note
33248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33249 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33257 \begin_layout Left Header
33258 \begin_inset Argument 1
33261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33281 \begin_inset Note Note
33284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33285 defines the header line as described below
33293 \begin_layout Center Header
33294 \begin_inset Argument 1
33297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33306 \begin_layout Right Header
33307 \begin_inset Argument 1
33310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33331 \begin_layout Left Footer
33332 \begin_inset Argument 1
33335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33356 \begin_layout Center Footer
33357 \begin_inset Argument 1
33360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33372 \begin_inset Newline newline
33376 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33382 \begin_layout Right Footer
33383 \begin_inset Argument 1
33386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33408 \begin_layout Section
33409 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33412 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33417 \begin_inset Index idx
33420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33421 Document ! Header/Footer line
33427 \begin_inset Index idx
33430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33439 \begin_layout Standard
33440 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33444 \begin_inset space ~
33455 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33461 \begin_inset space ~
33467 As a second step add in the menu
33469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33470 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33479 Custom Header/Footerlines
33482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33486 This module offers the following 6
33487 \begin_inset space ~
33493 \begin_layout Description
33495 \begin_inset space ~
33499 \begin_inset space ~
33503 \begin_inset space ~
33507 \begin_inset space ~
33511 \begin_inset space ~
33517 \begin_layout Description
33519 \begin_inset space ~
33523 \begin_inset space ~
33527 \begin_inset space ~
33531 \begin_inset space ~
33535 \begin_inset space ~
33541 \begin_layout Standard
33542 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33543 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33546 \begin_layout Standard
33547 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33548 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33550 \begin_inset space ~
33554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33556 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33560 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33563 \begin_layout Standard
33564 \begin_inset Float figure
33570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33573 \begin_inset Tabular
33574 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33575 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33576 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33577 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33578 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33580 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33598 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33627 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33638 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33642 The normal text on the page goes here.
33643 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33645 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33646 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33651 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33660 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33671 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33689 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33700 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33718 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33736 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33741 name "fig:Page-layout"
33745 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33758 \begin_layout Standard
33759 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33767 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33771 \begin_inset space ~
33776 is set to “Default”.
33777 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33786 \begin_layout Subsection
33790 \begin_layout Standard
33791 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33792 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33793 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33794 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33796 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33798 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33801 \begin_layout Standard
33802 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33803 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33809 \begin_inset space ~
33817 \begin_layout Description
33820 thepage prints the current page number
33823 \begin_layout Description
33826 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33829 \begin_layout Description
33832 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33835 \begin_layout Description
33838 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33839 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33846 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33849 because it usually goes in a left header.
33852 \begin_layout Description
33855 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33856 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33858 It is normally used in the right header.
33861 \begin_layout Subsection
33862 Default header/footer
33865 \begin_layout Standard
33866 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33867 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33868 footer has the page number.
33869 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33870 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33871 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33874 \begin_inset space ~
33882 \begin_layout Subsection
33886 \begin_layout Standard
33887 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33888 Some pages are different.
33889 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33890 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33891 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33892 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33893 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33896 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33897 Header and footer decoration line
33900 \begin_layout Standard
33901 By default, you get a 0.4
33902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33905 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33906 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33918 in the following way:
33921 \begin_layout Standard
33928 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33931 \begin_layout Standard
33932 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33945 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33946 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33952 \begin_layout Standard
33953 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33955 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33956 \begin_inset space ~
33960 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33970 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33971 Several header/footer lines
33974 \begin_layout Standard
33975 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33976 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33977 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33979 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33995 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34005 \begin_layout Standard
34012 headheight}{height}
34015 \begin_layout Standard
34020 is a size in standard units (e.
34021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34025 \begin_inset space \space{}
34033 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34034 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34035 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34036 logfile with the menu
34038 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34040 \begin_inset space ~
34048 \begin_inset space ~
34053 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34058 \begin_inset Index idx
34061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34063 -packages ! fancyhdr
34069 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34070 for your header/footer.
34073 \begin_layout Subsection
34077 \begin_layout Standard
34078 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34079 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34080 This example consists of the following definition:
34083 \begin_layout Description
34085 \begin_inset space ~
34094 , empty optional argument
34097 \begin_layout Description
34099 \begin_inset space ~
34102 Header empty, empty optional argument
34105 \begin_layout Description
34107 \begin_inset space ~
34116 in the optional argument
34119 \begin_layout Description
34121 \begin_inset space ~
34130 in the optional argument
34133 \begin_layout Description
34135 \begin_inset space ~
34148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34152 \begin_inset Newline newline
34156 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34163 in the optional argument
34166 \begin_layout Description
34168 \begin_inset space ~
34177 , empty optional argument
34180 \begin_layout Description
34183 headrulewidth set to 2
34184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34190 \begin_layout Standard
34191 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34192 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34198 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34208 \begin_layout Standard
34209 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34215 \begin_layout Standard
34219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34223 pagestyle{headings}
34229 \begin_inset Note Note
34232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34233 switches back to page style with the default headings
34241 \begin_layout Section
34242 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34245 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34250 \begin_inset Index idx
34253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34260 \begin_inset Index idx
34263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34272 \begin_layout Standard
34274 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34275 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34276 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34279 \begin_layout Subsection
34283 \begin_layout Standard
34284 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34290 \begin_inset Index idx
34293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34295 -packages ! preview-latex
34300 (on some systems named simply
34305 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34307 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34314 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34316 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34324 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34325 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34326 -package are automatically
34327 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34331 \begin_layout Subsection
34335 \begin_layout Standard
34336 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34337 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34339 activate the option
34342 \begin_inset space ~
34349 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34355 \begin_inset space ~
34359 \begin_inset space ~
34362 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34369 \begin_inset space ~
34382 \begin_inset space ~
34387 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34390 \begin_layout Standard
34391 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34396 \begin_inset space ~
34404 \begin_inset space ~
34412 \begin_layout Standard
34413 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34414 and when you finish
34418 \begin_layout Standard
34419 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34427 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34428 generated by activating the option
34431 \begin_inset space ~
34437 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34445 \begin_layout Subsection
34446 Selected document parts
34449 \begin_layout Standard
34450 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34451 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34452 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34453 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34455 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34457 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34461 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34462 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34463 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34466 \begin_layout Standard
34467 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34474 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34486 is explained in section
34488 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34493 \begin_inset space ~
34503 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34504 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34505 the final rotated boxes,
34506 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34507 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34509 Here is the result:
34512 \begin_layout Standard
34513 \begin_inset Preview
34515 \begin_layout Standard
34520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34524 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34530 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34540 height_special "totalheight"
34545 backgroundcolor "none"
34548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34573 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34579 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34601 \begin_layout Standard
34602 Previewing works also for colors.
34603 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34622 is explained in section
34629 \begin_inset space ~
34642 \begin_layout Standard
34643 \begin_inset Preview
34645 \begin_layout Standard
34649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34668 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34673 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34692 \begin_layout Standard
34693 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34699 \begin_layout Standard
34700 If \SpecialChar LyX
34701 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34702 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34703 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34704 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34705 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34706 the \SpecialChar TeX
34708 If \SpecialChar LyX
34709 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34710 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34712 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34713 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34714 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34717 \begin_layout Subsection
34722 \begin_layout Standard
34723 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34724 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34727 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34729 \begin_inset space ~
34734 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34736 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34738 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34739 's main window, then only this selection
34740 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34741 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34742 the source view window.
34747 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34748 ; but note that if you have
34749 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34751 not just the one which is open at the time.
34754 \begin_layout Section
34755 Advanced Find and Replace
34756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34758 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34763 \begin_inset Index idx
34766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34773 \begin_inset Index idx
34776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34785 \begin_layout Subsection
34789 \begin_layout Standard
34790 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34791 allows for searching of complex,
34792 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34794 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34795 The key-features are:
34798 \begin_layout Itemize
34799 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34800 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34801 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34805 \begin_layout Itemize
34806 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34807 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34808 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34809 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34812 \begin_layout Itemize
34813 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34814 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34815 outside of mathematics environments
34818 \begin_layout Itemize
34819 Search may be widened to a specific
34824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34828 \begin_inset space ~
34831 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34832 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34839 \begin_layout Itemize
34840 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34841 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34846 \begin_inset space ~
34849 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34852 \begin_layout Subsection
34856 \begin_layout Standard
34857 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34859 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34872 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34875 ) or the toolbar button
34878 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34884 Advanced Find and Replace
34889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34893 \begin_layout Standard
34899 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34903 \begin_inset space ~
34908 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34911 arg "paragraph-break"
34915 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34916 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34920 arg "paragraph-break"
34923 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34927 searches backwards.
34930 \begin_layout Standard
34934 \begin_inset space ~
34939 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34948 \begin_inset space ~
34953 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34956 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34957 Searching for mathematics
34960 \begin_layout Standard
34961 Mathematical formulas, such as
34962 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34965 or something more complex like
34966 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34969 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34974 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34975 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34976 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34977 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34983 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34987 \begin_layout Standard
34988 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34989 This is done by switching to the
34993 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34998 This way, entering in the
35005 \begin_layout Itemize
35006 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35007 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35010 \begin_layout Itemize
35011 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35012 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35015 \begin_layout Itemize
35016 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35017 of it only within section headings.
35018 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35019 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35023 \begin_layout Itemize
35024 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35025 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35028 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35032 \begin_layout Standard
35033 The entries made in the
35037 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35040 \begin_inset space ~
35046 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35050 button or alternatively press
35053 arg "paragraph-break"
35060 while the cursor is in the
35063 \begin_inset space ~
35071 \begin_layout Standard
35072 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35074 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35078 \begin_layout Itemize
35079 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35080 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35088 with its typewriter version
35089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35103 \begin_layout Itemize
35104 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35110 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35122 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35129 (you may want to enable the
35132 \begin_inset space ~
35140 \begin_inset space ~
35145 options and disable the
35153 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35161 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35162 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35166 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35169 , or occurrences of
35170 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35174 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35180 \begin_layout Subsection
35184 \begin_layout Standard
35185 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35190 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35194 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35204 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35210 This is done with the context menu
35212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35213 Insert Regular Expression
35215 while the cursor is in the
35220 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35221 expression matching rules
35225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35226 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35233 \begin_inset space ~
35236 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35237 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35243 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35244 same text in the document.
35245 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35246 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35249 \begin_layout Enumerate
35250 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35255 editor the fraction
35256 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35260 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35263 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35264 fractions with the given denominator.
35267 \begin_layout Enumerate
35268 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35280 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35285 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35286 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35287 Also, by inserting a
35288 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35291 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35292 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35295 \begin_layout Standard
35296 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35297 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35298 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35301 , and referring back to them through
35302 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35306 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35310 For example, try searching with the regexp
35311 \begin_inset Newline newline
35314 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35317 \begin_inset Newline newline
35320 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35323 \begin_layout Standard
35324 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35327 \begin_layout Standard
35328 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35336 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35337 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35338 sub-expressions is absolute.
35340 \begin_inset space ~
35344 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35347 always refers to the first occurrence of
35348 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35351 in all entered regexps.
35359 \begin_layout Section
35361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35363 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35368 \begin_inset Index idx
35371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35380 \begin_layout Standard
35382 has a built-in spell checker.
35385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35392 key or the toolbar button
35395 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35398 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35399 beginning of the currently selected text.
35400 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35401 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35402 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35403 scrolled so that it is visible.
35404 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35405 n, if any could be found.
35406 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35410 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35411 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35414 \begin_layout Standard
35415 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35418 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35422 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35423 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35425 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35426 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35429 \begin_inset space ~
35437 arg "dialog-show character"
35440 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35442 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35445 \begin_layout Standard
35446 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35447 can be downloaded from here:
35448 \begin_inset Newline newline
35452 \begin_inset Flex URL
35455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35457 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35463 \begin_inset Newline newline
35467 \begin_inset space ~
35470 files for each language.
35471 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35472 \begin_inset space ~
35475 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35476 's installation subfolder
35484 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35486 \begin_inset Newline newline
35489 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35490 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35491 but in most cases these are
35507 is the language code.
35510 \begin_layout Subsection
35514 \begin_layout Standard
35517 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35518 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35520 \begin_inset space ~
35523 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35526 you can set the following things:
35529 \begin_layout Description
35531 \begin_inset space ~
35534 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35535 should use for spell checking.
35536 Depending on your platform,
35550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35551 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35552 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35567 \begin_inset space ~
35570 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35573 \begin_layout Description
35575 \begin_inset space ~
35578 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35579 will always use the given language
35580 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35583 \begin_layout Description
35585 \begin_inset space ~
35588 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35594 \begin_inset space \space{}
35598 This should normally not be needed.
35601 \begin_layout Description
35603 \begin_inset space ~
35607 \begin_inset space ~
35610 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35622 \begin_layout Description
35624 \begin_inset space ~
35627 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35628 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35629 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35630 appear in a context menu.
35631 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35635 \begin_layout Description
35637 \begin_inset space ~
35641 \begin_inset space ~
35645 \begin_inset space ~
35648 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35652 \begin_layout Section
35654 \begin_inset Index idx
35657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35666 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35673 \begin_layout Standard
35675 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35676 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35686 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35688 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35698 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35700 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35701 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35702 which are available for many languages.
35705 \begin_layout Standard
35706 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35707 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35711 \begin_layout Subsection
35712 Setting up the thesaurus
35715 \begin_layout Standard
35724 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35728 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35733 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35739 \begin_inset space ~
35747 For instance, the US English files are named:
35750 \begin_layout Itemize
35754 \begin_layout Itemize
35758 \begin_layout Standard
35767 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35768 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35771 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35772 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35773 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35775 \begin_inset space ~
35780 ) to the path where they are installed.
35784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35785 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35786 ies, typical locations are
35792 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35796 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35800 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35803 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35809 LibreOffice-<Version>
35816 On the Mac, the default location is
35818 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35819 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35820 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35821 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35822 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35823 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35831 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35832 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35833 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35837 \begin_layout Standard
35838 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35839 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35843 \begin_layout Itemize
35844 \begin_inset Flex URL
35847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35849 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35857 \begin_layout Standard
35858 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35859 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35861 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35862 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35863 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35865 \begin_inset space ~
35870 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35872 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35873 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35877 \begin_layout Standard
35878 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35880 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35883 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35889 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35892 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35893 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35901 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35902 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35903 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35905 \begin_inset space ~
35910 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35913 \begin_layout Subsection
35914 Using the thesaurus
35917 \begin_layout Standard
35918 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35920 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35923 or the toolbar button
35926 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35929 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35931 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35933 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35934 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35935 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35944 ), related terms (such as
35947 \begin_inset space ~
35956 ), compounds (such as
35959 \begin_inset space ~
35968 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35977 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35980 \begin_layout Standard
35981 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35982 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35986 \begin_layout Standard
35987 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35988 the dictionary, such as the above
35992 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35997 \begin_inset space \space{}
36000 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36001 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36002 For example, looking up the word form
36006 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36011 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36016 \begin_inset space \space{}
36027 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36028 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36029 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36032 \begin_layout Section
36034 \begin_inset Index idx
36037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36044 \begin_inset Index idx
36047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36048 Document ! Change Tracking
36054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36056 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36063 \begin_layout Standard
36064 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36065 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36066 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36067 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36069 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36071 \begin_inset space ~
36074 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36076 \begin_inset space ~
36084 \begin_layout Standard
36085 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36099 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36100 You can change the color in
36102 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36103 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36105 \begin_inset space ~
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36114 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36120 \begin_inset Index idx
36123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36124 Color ! Change tracking
36129 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36130 's status bar when the
36131 cursor is in changed text.
36132 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36135 arg "changes-merge"
36141 \begin_layout Standard
36142 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36144 \begin_inset Index idx
36147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36156 \begin_layout Standard
36157 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36163 \begin_layout Standard
36164 \begin_inset Graphics
36165 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36173 \begin_layout Standard
36174 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36180 \begin_layout Standard
36181 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36184 \begin_layout Standard
36185 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36191 \begin_layout Standard
36192 \begin_inset Tabular
36193 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36194 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36195 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36196 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36206 arg "changes-track"
36214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36220 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36222 \begin_inset space ~
36225 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36245 arg "changes-output"
36253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36261 \begin_inset space ~
36264 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36266 \begin_inset space ~
36270 \begin_inset space ~
36274 \begin_inset space ~
36283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36304 Jumps to the next change
36310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36319 arg "change-accept"
36327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36333 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36335 \begin_inset space ~
36338 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36340 \begin_inset space ~
36349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36358 arg "change-reject"
36366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36374 \begin_inset space ~
36377 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36379 \begin_inset space ~
36388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36397 arg "changes-merge"
36405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36411 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36413 \begin_inset space ~
36416 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36418 \begin_inset space ~
36427 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36436 arg "all-changes-accept"
36444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36452 \begin_inset space ~
36455 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36457 \begin_inset space ~
36461 \begin_inset space ~
36470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36479 arg "all-changes-reject"
36487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36493 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36495 \begin_inset space ~
36498 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36500 \begin_inset space ~
36504 \begin_inset space ~
36513 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36536 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36537 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36539 \begin_inset space ~
36548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36571 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36573 \begin_inset space ~
36589 \begin_layout Standard
36590 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36596 \begin_layout Standard
36597 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36617 \begin_layout Standard
36618 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36619 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36620 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36621 the next change after the current cursor position.
36622 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36623 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36624 step to the next change.
36625 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36628 \begin_layout Standard
36629 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36630 to describe a change.
36633 \begin_layout Standard
36634 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36640 \begin_inset Index idx
36643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36645 -packages ! dvipost
36651 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36653 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36660 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36664 \begin_layout Section
36665 Comparison of Documents
36666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36668 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36673 \begin_inset Index idx
36676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36677 Comparison of documents
36685 \begin_layout Standard
36686 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36689 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36693 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36694 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36696 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36698 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36702 \begin_inset space ~
36706 \begin_inset space ~
36710 \begin_inset space ~
36719 \begin_inset space ~
36723 \begin_inset space ~
36727 \begin_inset space ~
36731 \begin_inset space ~
36735 \begin_inset space ~
36739 \begin_inset space ~
36744 enables the change tracking option
36747 \begin_inset space ~
36751 \begin_inset space ~
36755 \begin_inset space ~
36760 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36763 \begin_layout Section
36764 International Support
36765 \begin_inset Index idx
36768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36769 International support
36777 \begin_layout Standard
36778 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36779 with any language you want.
36780 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36781 up \SpecialChar LyX
36783 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36785 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36793 \begin_layout Standard
36794 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36795 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36796 \begin_inset space ~
36800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36802 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36809 \begin_layout Subsection
36811 \begin_inset Index idx
36814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36821 \begin_inset Index idx
36824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36825 Document ! Settings
36831 \begin_inset Index idx
36834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36835 Document ! Language
36843 \begin_layout Standard
36846 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36847 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36850 dialog lets you set
36852 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36857 \begin_layout Standard
36862 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36867 \begin_inset space ~
36872 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36873 For details about the different encoding options see section
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36880 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36887 \begin_layout Subsection
36888 Keyboard mapping configuration
36889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36891 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36898 \begin_layout Standard
36899 If you have for example a U.
36900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36903 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36904 can use an alternate keymap.
36905 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36910 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36911 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36912 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36915 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36916 \begin_inset space ~
36920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36922 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36927 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36928 which one you want to use.
36931 \begin_layout Standard
36932 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36933 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36934 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36938 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36939 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36940 one to support the characters you want.
36941 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36948 \begin_layout Chapter
36951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36953 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36960 \begin_layout Standard
36961 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36962 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36963 topic inside the user's guide.
36966 \begin_layout Section
36968 \begin_inset Index idx
36971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36980 \begin_layout Standard
36985 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36988 \begin_layout Subsection
36992 \begin_layout Standard
36993 Creates a new document.
36996 \begin_layout Subsection
37000 \begin_layout Standard
37001 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37002 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37003 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37006 \begin_layout Subsection
37010 \begin_layout Standard
37014 \begin_layout Subsection
37018 \begin_layout Standard
37019 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37020 Click there on a file to open it.
37023 \begin_layout Subsection
37027 \begin_layout Standard
37028 Closes the current document.
37031 \begin_layout Subsection
37035 \begin_layout Standard
37036 Closes all opened documents.
37039 \begin_layout Subsection
37043 \begin_layout Standard
37044 Saves the actual document.
37047 \begin_layout Subsection
37051 \begin_layout Standard
37052 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37055 \begin_layout Subsection
37059 \begin_layout Standard
37060 Saves all opened documents.
37063 \begin_layout Subsection
37067 \begin_layout Standard
37068 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37071 \begin_layout Subsection
37075 \begin_layout Standard
37076 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37077 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37078 It is described in the section
37080 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37085 Additional Features
37090 \begin_layout Subsection
37094 \begin_layout Standard
37095 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37096 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37098 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37099 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37103 \begin_layout Standard
37104 When using the menu entry
37107 \begin_inset space ~
37112 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37116 \begin_inset space ~
37120 \begin_inset space ~
37124 \begin_inset space ~
37129 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37130 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37133 \begin_layout Subsection
37135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37137 name "subsec:Export"
37144 \begin_layout Standard
37145 You can export your document to various file formats.
37146 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37148 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37149 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37150 during its configuration.
37153 \begin_layout Standard
37154 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37156 \begin_inset space ~
37160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37162 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37169 \begin_layout Description
37175 \begin_inset space ~
37178 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37180 \begin_inset space ~
37183 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37184 \begin_inset Newline newline
37187 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37188 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37192 \begin_layout Description
37193 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37199 \begin_layout Description
37201 \begin_inset space ~
37204 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37210 \begin_layout Description
37211 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37212 's native DVI-format.
37213 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37214 files paths or file names in your document.
37216 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37223 \begin_layout Description
37224 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37225 in files paths or file names
37228 \begin_layout Description
37230 \begin_inset space ~
37237 ) DVI-format using the program
37239 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37242 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37246 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37254 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37262 \begin_layout Description
37264 \begin_inset space ~
37267 (cropped) the same as
37271 but with cropped page margins.
37274 \begin_layout Description
37276 \begin_inset space ~
37279 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37283 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37288 \begin_layout Description
37292 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37300 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37308 \begin_layout Description
37310 \begin_inset space ~
37314 \begin_inset space ~
37317 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37321 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37329 \begin_layout Description
37333 \begin_inset space ~
37342 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37343 source that is compilable with the program
37345 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37349 \begin_layout Description
37353 \begin_inset space ~
37358 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37359 source, additionally all images used in the document
37360 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37364 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37367 \begin_layout Description
37371 \begin_inset space ~
37376 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37377 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37378 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37386 \begin_layout Description
37390 \begin_inset space ~
37399 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37400 source that is compilable with the program
37406 \begin_layout Description
37408 \begin_inset space ~
37412 \begin_inset space ~
37419 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37420 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37426 \begin_layout Description
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37431 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37432 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37438 \begin_inset space \space{}
37443 \begin_inset space ~
37447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37462 represent the version number)
37465 \begin_layout Description
37467 \begin_inset space ~
37471 \begin_inset space ~
37474 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37475 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37476 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37480 \begin_layout Description
37481 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37482 's internal XHTML engine
37485 \begin_layout Description
37487 \begin_inset space ~
37491 \begin_inset space ~
37495 \begin_inset space ~
37499 \begin_inset space ~
37502 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37507 For the conversion the program
37516 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37519 \begin_layout Description
37520 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37525 \begin_layout Description
37527 \begin_inset space ~
37530 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37532 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37535 For the conversion the program
37544 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37547 \begin_layout Description
37549 \begin_inset space ~
37552 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37553 For the conversion the program
37562 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37565 \begin_layout Description
37567 \begin_inset space ~
37570 (cropped) the same as
37573 \begin_inset space ~
37578 but with cropped page margins
37581 \begin_layout Description
37585 \begin_inset space ~
37590 PDF-format using the program
37594 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37597 \begin_layout Description
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37605 \begin_inset space ~
37613 \begin_inset space ~
37618 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37623 \begin_inset space \space{}
37626 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37630 \begin_layout Description
37634 \begin_inset space ~
37639 PDF-format using the program
37641 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37644 , produces PDF-files directly
37647 \begin_layout Description
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37656 PDF-format using the program
37660 , produces PDF-files directly
37663 \begin_layout Description
37667 \begin_inset space ~
37672 PDF-format using the program
37676 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37679 \begin_layout Description
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37688 PDF-format using the program
37693 , produces PDF-files directly
37696 \begin_layout Description
37700 \begin_inset space ~
37708 \begin_layout Description
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37716 \begin_inset space ~
37721 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37722 and then exported as text using the program
37727 \begin_layout Description
37732 PostScript format using the program
37740 options see section
37741 \begin_inset space ~
37745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37747 reference "subsec:General-output"
37754 \begin_layout Description
37755 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37756 source and also code in the statistical programming
37770 it is possible to use
37774 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37778 \begin_layout Standard
37779 If one of the menu entries
37786 \begin_inset space ~
37795 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37797 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37799 \begin_inset space ~
37803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37805 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37810 \begin_inset Index idx
37813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37814 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37823 \begin_layout Subsection
37827 \begin_layout Standard
37828 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37829 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37832 \begin_inset space ~
37836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37838 reference "sec:Paths"
37843 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37852 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37853 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37854 's preferences as described in section
37855 \begin_inset space ~
37859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37861 reference "subsec:Converters"
37868 \begin_layout Subsection
37869 New and Close Window
37872 \begin_layout Standard
37873 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37877 \begin_layout Subsection
37881 \begin_layout Standard
37882 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37885 \begin_layout Section
37887 \begin_inset Index idx
37890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37899 \begin_layout Subsection
37903 \begin_layout Standard
37904 Described in section
37905 \begin_inset space ~
37909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37911 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37918 \begin_layout Subsection
37919 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37922 \begin_layout Standard
37923 Described in section
37924 \begin_inset space ~
37928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37930 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37937 \begin_layout Subsection
37941 \begin_layout Standard
37942 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37943 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37946 \begin_layout Subsection
37950 \begin_layout Standard
37951 Selects the whole document.
37954 \begin_layout Subsection
37955 Find & Replace (Quick)
37958 \begin_layout Standard
37959 Described in section
37960 \begin_inset space ~
37964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37966 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37973 \begin_layout Subsection
37974 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37977 \begin_layout Standard
37978 Described in section
37979 \begin_inset space ~
37983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37985 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37992 \begin_layout Subsection
37993 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37996 \begin_layout Standard
37997 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38001 \begin_layout Subsection
38005 \begin_layout Standard
38006 Described in section
38007 \begin_inset space ~
38011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38013 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38020 \begin_layout Subsection
38022 \begin_inset Index idx
38025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38026 Paragraph ! Settings
38034 \begin_layout Standard
38035 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38036 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38040 \begin_layout Standard
38041 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38042 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38049 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38051 \begin_inset space ~
38059 \begin_layout Subsection
38060 Table and Rows & Columns
38063 \begin_layout Standard
38064 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38065 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38066 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38069 \begin_layout Subsection
38073 \begin_layout Standard
38074 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38075 It will dissolve this inset.
38076 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38080 \begin_layout Subsection
38084 \begin_layout Standard
38085 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38086 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38089 \begin_layout Subsection
38090 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38093 \begin_layout Standard
38094 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38096 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38097 \begin_inset space ~
38101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38103 reference "sec:Nesting"
38108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38110 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38117 \begin_layout Subsection
38120 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38123 \begin_layout Standard
38124 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38125 nts of the same type.
38127 \begin_inset space ~
38131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38133 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38137 for an explanation.
38140 \begin_layout Section
38142 \begin_inset Index idx
38145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38154 \begin_layout Standard
38155 At the bottom of the
38159 menu the opened documents are listed.
38162 \begin_layout Subsection
38163 Open/Close all Insets
38166 \begin_layout Standard
38167 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38170 \begin_layout Subsection
38171 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38174 \begin_layout Standard
38175 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38178 \begin_layout Standard
38179 Math macros are described in the
38186 \begin_layout Subsection
38190 \begin_layout Standard
38191 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38192 \begin_inset space ~
38196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38198 reference "sec:Navigating"
38203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38205 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38212 \begin_layout Subsection
38216 \begin_layout Standard
38217 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38219 \begin_inset space ~
38223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38225 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38232 \begin_layout Subsection
38236 \begin_layout Standard
38237 Opens a window showing console messages.
38238 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38243 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38244 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38245 is processing the document.
38248 \begin_layout Subsection
38250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38252 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38257 \begin_inset Index idx
38260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38269 \begin_layout Standard
38270 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38271 All toolbars and the
38274 \begin_inset space ~
38279 can be turned on and off.
38284 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38296 \begin_inset space ~
38308 \begin_inset space ~
38313 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38317 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38324 \begin_layout Standard
38329 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38333 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38334 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38335 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38336 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38337 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38340 \begin_layout Standard
38342 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38343 \begin_inset space ~
38347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38349 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38356 \begin_layout Subsection
38360 \begin_layout Standard
38364 \begin_inset space ~
38368 \begin_inset space ~
38372 \begin_inset space ~
38376 \begin_inset space ~
38380 \begin_inset space ~
38384 \begin_inset space ~
38389 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38390 's main window vertically while
38393 \begin_inset space ~
38397 \begin_inset space ~
38401 \begin_inset space ~
38405 \begin_inset space ~
38409 \begin_inset space ~
38413 \begin_inset space ~
38418 will split it horizontally.
38419 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38420 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38421 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38422 three or more documents at the same time.
38423 To close a split view, use the menu
38426 \begin_inset space ~
38430 \begin_inset space ~
38438 \begin_layout Subsection
38442 \begin_layout Standard
38443 Closes a split view.
38446 \begin_layout Subsection
38450 \begin_layout Standard
38451 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38452 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38453 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38454 's main window fullscreen.
38455 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38456 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38459 \begin_layout Section
38461 \begin_inset Index idx
38464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38473 \begin_layout Subsection
38477 \begin_layout Standard
38478 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38479 \begin_inset space ~
38483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38485 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38496 \begin_layout Subsection
38498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38500 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38507 \begin_layout Standard
38508 Here you can insert the following characters:
38511 \begin_layout Description
38516 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38519 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38520 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38521 -packages you have installed.
38522 You can get a complete display by checking
38525 \begin_inset space ~
38531 \begin_inset Newline newline
38535 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38543 Not all characters will be visible in the
38547 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38548 dialog (see section
38549 \begin_inset space ~
38553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38555 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38559 ) can display every character.
38567 \begin_layout Description
38568 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38572 \begin_layout Description
38574 \begin_inset space ~
38578 \begin_inset space ~
38581 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38588 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38595 \begin_layout Description
38597 \begin_inset space ~
38600 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38604 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38610 \begin_layout Description
38612 \begin_inset space ~
38615 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38618 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38619 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38625 \begin_layout Description
38627 \begin_inset space ~
38630 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38634 \begin_layout Description
38636 \begin_inset space ~
38639 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38643 \begin_layout Description
38645 \begin_inset space ~
38648 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38654 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38660 \begin_layout Description
38662 \begin_inset space ~
38665 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38669 \begin_layout Description
38671 \begin_inset space ~
38675 \begin_inset Index idx
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38685 \begin_inset Index idx
38688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38689 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38694 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38695 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38697 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38703 \begin_inset Index idx
38706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38714 \begin_inset Newline newline
38717 More information about this feature can be found in the
38723 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38729 \begin_layout Description
38730 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38732 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38733 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38737 \begin_layout Subsection
38741 \begin_layout Standard
38742 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38745 \begin_layout Description
38746 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38747 \begin_inset script superscript
38749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38758 \begin_layout Description
38759 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38760 \begin_inset script subscript
38762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 \begin_layout Description
38773 \begin_inset space ~
38776 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38777 \begin_inset space ~
38781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38783 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38790 \begin_layout Description
38792 \begin_inset space ~
38795 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38796 \begin_inset space ~
38800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38802 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38809 \begin_layout Description
38811 \begin_inset space ~
38814 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38815 \begin_inset space ~
38819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38821 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38828 \begin_layout Description
38830 \begin_inset space ~
38833 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38839 \begin_inset space \space{}
38842 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38843 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38852 To insert a fraction use the command
38857 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38861 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38870 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38877 \begin_layout Description
38879 \begin_inset space ~
38882 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38883 \begin_inset space ~
38887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38889 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38896 \begin_layout Description
38898 \begin_inset space ~
38901 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38902 \begin_inset space ~
38906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38908 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38915 \begin_layout Description
38917 \begin_inset space ~
38920 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38921 \begin_inset space ~
38925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38927 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38934 \begin_layout Description
38935 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38936 \begin_inset space ~
38940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38942 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38949 \begin_layout Description
38951 \begin_inset space ~
38954 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38955 \begin_inset space ~
38959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38961 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38968 \begin_layout Description
38970 \begin_inset space ~
38973 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38974 \begin_inset space ~
38978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38980 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38987 \begin_layout Description
38989 \begin_inset space ~
38993 \begin_inset space ~
38996 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38997 \begin_inset space ~
39001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39003 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39010 \begin_layout Description
39012 \begin_inset space ~
39015 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39016 as described in section
39017 \begin_inset space ~
39021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39023 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39030 \begin_layout Description
39032 \begin_inset space ~
39035 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39036 \begin_inset space ~
39040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39042 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39049 \begin_layout Description
39051 \begin_inset space ~
39054 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39055 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39057 \begin_inset space ~
39061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39063 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39070 \begin_layout Description
39072 \begin_inset space ~
39075 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39082 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39089 \begin_layout Description
39091 \begin_inset space ~
39095 \begin_inset space ~
39098 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39099 \begin_inset space ~
39103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39105 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39112 \begin_layout Subsection
39116 \begin_layout Standard
39117 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39121 \begin_inset space ~
39142 are described in section
39143 \begin_inset space ~
39147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39149 reference "sec:toc"
39158 is described in section
39159 \begin_inset space ~
39163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39165 reference "sec:Index"
39173 is described in section
39174 \begin_inset space ~
39178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39180 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39186 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39189 is described in section
39190 \begin_inset space ~
39194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39196 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39203 \begin_layout Subsection
39207 \begin_layout Standard
39208 To insert floats, as described in section
39209 \begin_inset space ~
39213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39215 reference "sec:Floats"
39219 and in detail the chapter
39226 \begin_inset space ~
39234 \begin_layout Subsection
39238 \begin_layout Standard
39239 To insert notes, described in section
39240 \begin_inset space ~
39244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39246 reference "sec:Notes"
39253 \begin_layout Subsection
39257 \begin_layout Standard
39258 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39260 Branches are described in section
39261 \begin_inset space ~
39265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39267 reference "sec:Branches"
39274 \begin_layout Subsection
39278 \begin_layout Standard
39279 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39280 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39282 An example is the document class
39283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39290 with three custom insets.
39293 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39297 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39303 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39306 \begin_layout Subsection
39308 \begin_inset Index idx
39311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39320 \begin_layout Standard
39321 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39323 For more information see chapter
39325 External Document Parts
39328 \begin_inset space ~
39334 \begin_layout Subsection
39336 \begin_inset Index idx
39339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39348 \begin_layout Standard
39349 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39350 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39357 \begin_inset space ~
39365 \begin_layout Subsection
39369 \begin_layout Standard
39374 dialog as described in section
39375 \begin_inset space ~
39379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39381 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39388 \begin_layout Subsection
39392 \begin_layout Standard
39397 as described in section
39398 \begin_inset space ~
39402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39404 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39411 \begin_layout Subsection
39415 \begin_layout Standard
39420 as described in section
39421 \begin_inset space ~
39425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39427 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39434 \begin_layout Subsection
39436 \begin_inset Index idx
39439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39446 \begin_inset Index idx
39449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39450 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39458 \begin_layout Standard
39459 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39460 Floats are described in section
39461 \begin_inset space ~
39465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39467 reference "sec:Floats"
39471 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39473 Multi-page Captions
39478 \begin_inset space ~
39486 \begin_layout Subsection
39490 \begin_layout Standard
39491 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39492 \begin_inset space ~
39496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39498 reference "sec:Index"
39505 \begin_layout Subsection
39509 \begin_layout Standard
39510 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39511 \begin_inset space ~
39515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39517 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39524 \begin_layout Subsection
39528 \begin_layout Standard
39529 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39530 Tables are described in section
39531 \begin_inset space ~
39535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39537 reference "sec:Tables"
39541 and in detail in the chapter
39548 \begin_inset space ~
39556 \begin_layout Subsection
39560 \begin_layout Standard
39566 Graphics are described in section
39567 \begin_inset space ~
39571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39573 reference "sec:Graphics"
39580 \begin_layout Subsection
39584 \begin_layout Standard
39585 Inserts a URL as described in section
39586 \begin_inset space ~
39590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39592 reference "subsec:URLs"
39599 \begin_layout Subsection
39603 \begin_layout Standard
39604 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39605 \begin_inset space ~
39609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39611 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39618 \begin_layout Subsection
39622 \begin_layout Standard
39623 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39624 \begin_inset space ~
39628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39630 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39637 \begin_layout Subsection
39641 \begin_layout Standard
39642 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39643 \begin_inset space ~
39647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39649 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39656 \begin_layout Subsection
39660 \begin_layout Standard
39661 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39662 title or caption of a float.
39663 Inserts a short title as described in section
39664 \begin_inset space ~
39668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39670 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39677 \begin_layout Subsection
39682 \begin_layout Standard
39683 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39684 Code box as described in section
39685 \begin_inset space ~
39689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39691 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39698 \begin_layout Subsection
39700 \begin_inset Index idx
39703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39712 \begin_layout Standard
39713 Inserts a program listings box.
39714 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39716 Program Code Listings
39721 \begin_inset space ~
39729 \begin_layout Subsection
39733 \begin_layout Standard
39734 Inserts the actual date.
39735 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39739 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39747 \begin_inset space ~
39755 \begin_layout Subsection
39759 \begin_layout Standard
39760 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39761 \begin_inset space ~
39765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39767 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39774 \begin_layout Section
39776 \begin_inset Index idx
39779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39788 \begin_layout Standard
39789 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39790 \begin_inset space ~
39793 of the current document.
39794 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39797 \begin_layout Subsection
39801 \begin_layout Standard
39802 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39803 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39804 to jump, for example, between section
39805 \begin_inset space ~
39809 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39810 \begin_inset space ~
39813 2.5 and use the submenu
39816 \begin_inset space ~
39820 \begin_inset space ~
39827 \begin_inset space ~
39833 \begin_inset space ~
39837 \begin_inset space ~
39843 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39847 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39853 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39856 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39859 \begin_layout Standard
39860 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39864 \begin_inset space ~
39869 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39872 \begin_inset space ~
39877 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39880 \begin_layout Subsection
39881 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39884 \begin_layout Standard
39885 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39889 \begin_layout Subsection
39893 \begin_layout Standard
39894 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39895 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39896 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39900 \begin_inset space ~
39904 \begin_inset space ~
39912 \begin_layout Subsection
39916 \begin_layout Standard
39917 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39920 The \SpecialChar LyX
39921 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39923 \begin_inset space ~
39931 \begin_inset space ~
39936 manual for a detailed description.
39939 \begin_layout Section
39941 \begin_inset Index idx
39944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39953 \begin_layout Subsection
39957 \begin_layout Standard
39958 Change Tracking is described in section
39959 \begin_inset space ~
39963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39965 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39972 \begin_layout Subsection
39980 \begin_layout Standard
39981 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39982 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39983 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39985 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39986 to the clipboard or update the view.
39987 \begin_inset Newline newline
39990 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39994 \begin_layout Standard
39997 Open Containing Directory
39999 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40000 's temporary folder for the document.
40001 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40002 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40003 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40004 For example some journals require to send the
40008 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40012 \begin_layout Subsection
40013 Start Appendix Here
40016 \begin_layout Standard
40017 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40018 as described in section
40019 \begin_inset space ~
40023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40025 reference "sec:Appendices"
40032 \begin_layout Subsection
40034 \begin_inset space ~
40040 \begin_layout Standard
40041 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40042 default output format for the document (menu
40044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40045 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40046 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40048 \begin_inset space ~
40052 \begin_inset space ~
40058 \begin_inset space ~
40062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40064 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40068 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40071 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40072 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40074 \begin_inset space ~
40077 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40079 \begin_inset space ~
40082 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40084 \begin_inset space ~
40088 \begin_inset space ~
40094 \begin_inset space ~
40098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40100 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40104 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40105 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40107 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40108 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40110 \begin_inset space ~
40113 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40115 \begin_inset space ~
40118 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40122 \begin_inset space ~
40126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40128 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40133 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40134 when it is first configured.
40135 The default output format is
40138 \begin_inset space ~
40146 \begin_layout Subsection
40147 View (Other Formats)
40150 \begin_layout Standard
40151 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40152 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40153 actual document with an external program.
40154 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40155 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40156 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40158 All possible formats are listed in section
40159 \begin_inset space ~
40163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40165 reference "subsec:Export"
40170 You should at least see the menu entry
40175 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40177 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40179 \begin_inset space ~
40183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40185 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40190 \begin_inset Index idx
40193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40194 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40203 \begin_layout Standard
40204 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40205 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40207 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40208 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40210 \begin_inset space ~
40213 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40215 \begin_inset space ~
40218 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40228 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40233 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40234 when it is first configured.
40237 \begin_layout Subsection
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40245 \begin_layout Standard
40246 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40247 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40250 \begin_layout Subsection
40251 Update (Other Formats)
40254 \begin_layout Standard
40255 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40256 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40259 \begin_layout Subsection
40260 View Master Document
40263 \begin_layout Standard
40264 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40280 \begin_inset space ~
40285 manual for more information on this topic).
40286 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40287 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40291 \begin_inset space ~
40295 \begin_inset space ~
40300 generates the output of the whole book, while
40304 will just output the chapter alone.
40307 \begin_layout Standard
40308 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40309 in the document settings (menu
40311 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40312 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40313 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40315 \begin_inset space ~
40319 \begin_inset space ~
40325 \begin_inset space ~
40329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40331 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40335 ) or in the preferences (menu
40337 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40338 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40340 \begin_inset space ~
40343 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40345 \begin_inset space ~
40348 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40350 \begin_inset space ~
40354 \begin_inset space ~
40360 \begin_inset space ~
40364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40366 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40373 \begin_layout Subsection
40374 Update Master Document
40377 \begin_layout Standard
40378 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40394 \begin_inset space ~
40399 manual for more information on this topic).
40400 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40401 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40404 \begin_layout Standard
40405 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40406 in the document settings (menu
40408 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40409 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40410 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40412 \begin_inset space ~
40416 \begin_inset space ~
40422 \begin_inset space ~
40426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40428 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40432 ) or in the preferences (menu
40434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40435 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40440 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40442 \begin_inset space ~
40445 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40447 \begin_inset space ~
40451 \begin_inset space ~
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40463 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40470 \begin_layout Subsection
40472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40474 name "subsec:Compressed"
40481 \begin_layout Standard
40482 Un/compresses the current document.
40483 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40484 compression (see the
40486 Additional Features
40488 manual for details).
40491 \begin_layout Subsection
40495 \begin_layout Standard
40496 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40499 \begin_layout Subsection
40503 \begin_layout Standard
40504 The document settings are described in appendix
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40511 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40518 \begin_layout Section
40520 \begin_inset Index idx
40523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40532 \begin_layout Subsection
40536 \begin_layout Standard
40537 Spell checking is explained in section
40538 \begin_inset space ~
40542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40544 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40551 \begin_layout Subsection
40555 \begin_layout Standard
40556 The thesaurus is described in section
40557 \begin_inset space ~
40561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40563 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40570 \begin_layout Subsection
40572 \begin_inset Index idx
40575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40582 \begin_inset Index idx
40585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40594 \begin_layout Standard
40595 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40596 the highlighted document part.
40599 \begin_layout Subsection
40605 \begin_inset Index idx
40608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40609 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40618 \begin_layout Standard
40619 Generates with the help of the program
40621 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40624 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40625 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40626 This feature is not available on Windows.
40629 \begin_layout Subsection
40635 \begin_inset Index idx
40638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40648 \begin_layout Standard
40649 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40654 \begin_inset space ~
40659 to see the full filename paths.
40662 \begin_layout Subsection
40664 \begin_inset Index idx
40667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40676 \begin_layout Standard
40677 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40678 files as described in section
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40685 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40692 \begin_layout Subsection
40694 \begin_inset Index idx
40697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40710 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40728 \begin_inset Index idx
40731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40732 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40741 \begin_layout Standard
40742 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40743 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40744 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40745 -packages and programs it needs; see
40747 \begin_inset space ~
40751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40753 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40760 \begin_layout Subsection
40764 \begin_layout Standard
40769 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40770 \begin_inset space ~
40774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40776 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40783 \begin_layout Section
40785 \begin_inset Index idx
40788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40797 \begin_layout Standard
40798 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40799 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40801 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40805 \begin_layout Standard
40809 \begin_inset space ~
40814 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40815 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40816 packages and classes found
40817 by \SpecialChar LyX
40819 \begin_inset space ~
40823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40825 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40832 \begin_layout Standard
40836 \begin_inset space ~
40841 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40846 \begin_layout Section
40848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40850 name "sec:Toolbars"
40857 \begin_layout Standard
40858 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40865 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40872 \begin_layout Standard
40873 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40874 This is described in the
40876 Additional Features
40881 \begin_layout Subsection
40883 \begin_inset Index idx
40886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40895 \begin_layout Standard
40896 \begin_inset Graphics
40897 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40905 \begin_layout Standard
40906 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40912 \begin_layout Standard
40913 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40930 \begin_inset Note Note
40933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40934 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40939 manual for more information.
40947 \begin_layout Standard
40948 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40954 \begin_layout Standard
40955 \begin_inset Tabular
40956 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40957 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40959 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40965 \begin_inset Graphics
40966 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40980 pull-down box for the environments
40993 \begin_layout Standard
40994 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41000 \begin_layout Standard
41002 \begin_inset Tabular
41003 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41004 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41005 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41006 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41030 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41037 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41060 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41067 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41090 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41106 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41120 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41127 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41136 arg "spelling-continuously"
41144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41148 Spellcheck continuously
41154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41177 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41207 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41237 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41267 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41297 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41313 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41327 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41346 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41353 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41367 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41395 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41409 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41410 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41438 Emphasize text, function of the
41440 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41442 \begin_inset space ~
41445 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41475 Set text to noun style, function of the
41477 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41479 \begin_inset space ~
41482 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41491 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41500 arg "textstyle-apply"
41508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41512 Format text using the current settings in the
41514 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41516 \begin_inset space ~
41519 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41552 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41554 \begin_inset space ~
41563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41572 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41600 arg "tabular-insert"
41608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41621 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41630 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41642 Toggle outline window on/off,
41644 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41660 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41672 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41687 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41699 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41712 \begin_layout Subsection
41714 \begin_inset Index idx
41717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41726 \begin_layout Standard
41727 \begin_inset Graphics
41728 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41736 \begin_layout Standard
41737 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41743 \begin_layout Standard
41744 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41748 \begin_layout Standard
41749 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41755 \begin_layout Standard
41756 \begin_inset Tabular
41757 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41758 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41759 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41760 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41797 arg "layout Enumerate"
41805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41815 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41824 arg "layout Itemize"
41832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41842 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41878 arg "layout Description"
41886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41896 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41905 arg "depth-increment"
41913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41919 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41921 \begin_inset space ~
41925 \begin_inset space ~
41934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41943 arg "depth-decrement"
41951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41957 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41959 \begin_inset space ~
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41981 arg "float-insert figure"
41989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41995 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41996 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42003 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42012 arg "float-insert table"
42020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42027 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42034 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42057 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42073 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42094 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42103 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42149 \begin_inset space ~
42158 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42167 arg "nomencl-insert"
42175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42181 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42183 \begin_inset space ~
42192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42201 arg "footnote-insert"
42209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42231 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42247 \begin_inset space ~
42256 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42279 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42280 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42282 \begin_inset space ~
42291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42300 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42314 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42321 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42376 \begin_inset space ~
42385 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42394 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42408 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42409 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42425 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42439 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42440 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42442 \begin_inset space ~
42451 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42460 arg "dialog-show character"
42468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42474 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42476 \begin_inset space ~
42479 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42486 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42495 arg "layout-paragraph"
42503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42509 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42511 \begin_inset space ~
42520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42529 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42543 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42557 \begin_layout Subsection
42558 View/Update Toolbar
42559 \begin_inset Index idx
42562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42563 Toolbar ! View / Update
42571 \begin_layout Standard
42572 \begin_inset Graphics
42573 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42580 \begin_layout Standard
42581 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42587 \begin_layout Standard
42588 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42592 \begin_layout Standard
42593 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42599 \begin_layout Standard
42600 \begin_inset Tabular
42601 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42602 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42603 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42604 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42628 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42644 arg "buffer-update"
42652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42658 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42674 arg "master-buffer-view"
42682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42688 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42690 \begin_inset space ~
42699 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42708 arg "master-buffer-update"
42716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42722 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42724 \begin_inset space ~
42728 \begin_inset space ~
42737 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42746 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42761 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42762 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42763 Synchronize with Output
42769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42793 View (Other Formats)
42799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42806 arg "update-others"
42814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42820 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42821 Update (Other Formats)
42834 \begin_layout Standard
42835 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42839 \begin_layout Subsection
42843 \begin_layout Standard
42844 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42845 \begin_inset space ~
42849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42851 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42855 , the table toolbar
42856 \begin_inset Index idx
42859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42868 \begin_inset space ~
42873 manual and the math macro toolbar
42874 \begin_inset Index idx
42877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42890 \begin_layout Chapter
42891 The Document Settings
42892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42894 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42899 \begin_inset Index idx
42902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42903 Document ! Settings
42911 \begin_layout Standard
42915 \begin_inset space ~
42920 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42921 is called with the menu
42923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42927 You can save your document settings as default with the
42929 Save as Document Defaults
42931 button in any dialog.
42932 This will create a template named
42936 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42937 when you create a new document without
42941 \begin_layout Standard
42946 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42947 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42950 \begin_layout Standard
42951 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42952 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42953 to find the one you are looking for.
42954 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42955 the submenus of the dialog.
42957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42961 \begin_inset space \space{}
42965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42972 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42973 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42974 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42977 \begin_layout Section
42981 \begin_layout Standard
42982 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42984 Document classes are described in section
42985 \begin_inset space ~
42989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42991 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42999 \begin_layout Standard
43003 \begin_inset space ~
43008 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43013 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43014 as a layout for a document class.
43015 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43017 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43026 \begin_layout Standard
43027 Some classes use special class options by default.
43028 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43032 and you can decide to use them or not.
43033 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43034 recommended you leave them untouched.
43039 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43040 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43045 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43047 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43053 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43054 \begin_inset Newline newline
43059 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43062 \begin_inset Newline newline
43065 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43066 distribution, see section
43071 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43073 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43086 \begin_layout Standard
43091 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43092 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43093 in the background if the child document
43094 is opened without its master.
43095 This way child documents are always compilable.
43096 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43103 \begin_inset space ~
43111 \begin_layout Standard
43112 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43123 \begin_inset Index idx
43126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43128 -packages ! prettyref
43134 \begin_inset Index idx
43137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43139 -packages ! refstyle
43144 for cross-references, see section
43145 \begin_inset space ~
43149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43151 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43158 \begin_layout Section
43162 \begin_layout Standard
43163 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43164 Please refer to the section
43167 \begin_inset space ~
43175 \begin_inset space ~
43180 manual for details.
43183 \begin_layout Section
43187 \begin_layout Standard
43188 Modules are explained in section
43189 \begin_inset space ~
43193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43195 reference "subsec:Modules"
43202 \begin_layout Section
43206 \begin_layout Standard
43208 \begin_inset space ~
43212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43214 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43221 \begin_layout Section
43225 \begin_layout Standard
43226 The document font settings are described in section
43227 \begin_inset space ~
43231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43233 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43240 \begin_layout Section
43244 \begin_layout Standard
43245 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43257 \begin_inset space ~
43262 and whether it should be a
43265 \begin_inset space ~
43270 can also be specified here.
43273 \begin_layout Standard
43274 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43275 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43276 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43278 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43281 \begin_layout Standard
43284 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43287 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43288 justifies the text on screen.
43289 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43293 \begin_layout Section
43297 \begin_layout Standard
43298 This dialog is described in sections
43299 \begin_inset space ~
43303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43305 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43312 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43319 \begin_layout Section
43323 \begin_layout Standard
43324 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43325 \begin_inset space ~
43329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43331 reference "subsec:Margins"
43338 \begin_layout Section
43340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43342 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43347 \begin_inset Index idx
43350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43351 Language ! Encoding
43359 \begin_layout Standard
43360 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43361 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43362 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43364 is always encoded in utf8).
43365 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43366 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43367 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43368 -command is not known for
43369 a particular character).
43372 \begin_layout Standard
43373 If you use the option
43378 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43379 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43380 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43382 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43383 exactly one encoding.
43384 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43387 \begin_layout Standard
43389 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43390 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43391 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43392 installation supports Unicode), choose
43393 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43394 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43395 is quite incomplete, so
43396 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43401 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43402 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43403 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43404 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43405 -commands is not used, because all
43406 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43407 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43408 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43409 , two new alternative engines
43410 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43412 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43414 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43417 \begin_inset space ~
43425 \begin_inset space ~
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43439 \begin_inset space ~
43443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43445 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43450 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43454 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43457 \begin_layout Standard
43461 \begin_inset space ~
43466 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43467 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43477 The possible settings are:
43480 \begin_layout Description
43481 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43483 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43484 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43488 \begin_inset space ~
43492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43494 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43501 \begin_layout Description
43502 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43503 format you will use.
43504 In many cases this will be
43509 \begin_inset Index idx
43512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43520 If the newer package
43525 \begin_inset Index idx
43528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43530 -packages ! polyglossia
43535 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43536 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43537 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43539 this package will be used instead of
43546 \begin_layout Description
43548 \begin_inset space ~
43559 would be more appropriate.
43562 \begin_layout Description
43563 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43564 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43568 (for German texts), type in
43571 \begin_inset Newline newline
43576 usepackage{ngerman}
43579 \begin_layout Description
43580 None will not use a language package.
43581 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43584 \begin_layout Standard
43585 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43588 \begin_layout Description
43590 \begin_inset space ~
43594 \begin_inset space ~
43598 \begin_inset space ~
43605 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43611 \begin_inset Index idx
43614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43616 -packages ! inputenc
43622 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43623 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43624 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43628 \begin_layout Description
43629 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43631 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43632 commands, which may result in a big
43633 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43634 -commands are needed.
43637 \begin_layout Description
43639 \begin_inset space ~
43643 \begin_inset space ~
43646 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43649 \begin_layout Description
43651 \begin_inset space ~
43655 \begin_inset space ~
43658 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43661 \begin_layout Description
43663 \begin_inset space ~
43666 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43669 \begin_layout Description
43671 \begin_inset space ~
43675 \begin_inset space ~
43678 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43679 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43682 \begin_layout Description
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43691 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43695 \begin_layout Description
43697 \begin_inset space ~
43701 \begin_inset space ~
43704 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43705 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43708 \begin_layout Description
43710 \begin_inset space ~
43714 \begin_inset space ~
43718 \begin_inset space ~
43721 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43728 \begin_layout Description
43730 \begin_inset space ~
43734 \begin_inset space ~
43738 \begin_inset space ~
43741 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43742 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43745 \begin_layout Description
43747 \begin_inset space ~
43751 \begin_inset space ~
43754 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43755 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43756 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43757 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43758 \begin_inset space ~
43762 \begin_inset space ~
43768 \begin_layout Description
43770 \begin_inset space ~
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43777 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43778 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43779 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43781 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43782 \begin_inset space ~
43786 \begin_inset space ~
43792 \begin_layout Description
43794 \begin_inset space ~
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43801 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43804 \begin_layout Description
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43813 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43816 \begin_layout Description
43818 \begin_inset space ~
43822 \begin_inset space ~
43825 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43828 \begin_layout Description
43830 \begin_inset space ~
43833 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43836 \begin_layout Description
43838 \begin_inset space ~
43841 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43844 \begin_layout Description
43846 \begin_inset space ~
43850 \begin_inset space ~
43853 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43856 \begin_layout Description
43858 \begin_inset space ~
43862 \begin_inset space ~
43868 \begin_layout Description
43870 \begin_inset space ~
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43877 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43880 \begin_layout Description
43882 \begin_inset space ~
43886 \begin_inset space ~
43892 \begin_layout Description
43894 \begin_inset space ~
43898 \begin_inset space ~
43901 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43907 \begin_inset Index idx
43910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43917 , when using this, set the document language to
43922 \begin_layout Description
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43928 \begin_inset space ~
43931 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43936 , when using this, set the document language to
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43945 \begin_layout Description
43947 \begin_inset space ~
43951 \begin_inset space ~
43954 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43960 \begin_inset Index idx
43963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43965 -packages ! japanese
43970 , when using this, set the document language to
43975 \begin_layout Description
43977 \begin_inset space ~
43981 \begin_inset space ~
43984 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43989 , when using this, set the document language to
43994 \begin_layout Description
43996 \begin_inset space ~
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44003 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44008 , when using this, set the document language to
44013 \begin_layout Description
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44018 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44021 \begin_layout Description
44023 \begin_inset space ~
44027 \begin_inset space ~
44031 \begin_inset space ~
44034 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44037 \begin_layout Description
44039 \begin_inset space ~
44043 \begin_inset space ~
44047 \begin_inset space ~
44050 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44051 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44052 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44055 \begin_layout Description
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44067 \begin_layout Description
44069 \begin_inset space ~
44073 \begin_inset space ~
44076 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44077 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44080 \begin_layout Description
44082 \begin_inset space ~
44086 \begin_inset space ~
44089 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44095 \begin_inset Index idx
44098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44105 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44108 \begin_layout Description
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44118 \begin_inset space ~
44121 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44128 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44131 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44138 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44139 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44141 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44144 \begin_layout Description
44146 \begin_inset space ~
44150 \begin_inset space ~
44153 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44159 \begin_inset Index idx
44162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44169 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44172 \begin_layout Description
44174 \begin_inset space ~
44177 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44183 \begin_inset Index idx
44186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44188 -packages ! inputenc
44194 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44198 \begin_layout Description
44200 \begin_inset space ~
44204 \begin_inset space ~
44208 \begin_inset space ~
44211 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44212 \begin_inset space ~
44218 \begin_layout Description
44220 \begin_inset space ~
44224 \begin_inset space ~
44228 \begin_inset space ~
44231 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44232 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44233 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44237 \begin_layout Description
44239 \begin_inset space ~
44243 \begin_inset space ~
44247 \begin_inset space ~
44250 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44251 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44254 \begin_layout Section
44256 \begin_inset Index idx
44259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44266 \begin_inset Index idx
44269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44276 \begin_inset Index idx
44279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44280 Color ! Shaded boxes
44286 \begin_inset Index idx
44289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44290 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44298 \begin_layout Standard
44299 Here you can alter the font color for the
44303 (default: black), for
44306 \begin_inset space ~
44311 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44315 (default: white) and for
44318 \begin_inset space ~
44328 sets the color back to the default.
44331 \begin_layout Standard
44332 Clicking any button showing
44340 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44341 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44342 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44343 later more quickly.
44346 \begin_layout Standard
44347 Note, if you change the
44350 \begin_inset space ~
44355 font color and use the option
44358 \begin_inset space ~
44363 in the document settings under
44366 \begin_inset space ~
44371 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44372 \begin_inset space ~
44376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44378 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44385 \begin_layout Standard
44386 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44392 \begin_layout Standard
44396 \begin_inset space ~
44405 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44408 \begin_inset space ~
44411 Code after a forced page break:
44414 \begin_layout Itemize
44415 For the page color:
44416 \begin_inset Newline newline
44423 pagecolor{color name}
44426 \begin_layout Itemize
44427 For the text color:
44428 \begin_inset Newline newline
44438 \begin_layout Standard
44439 You are restricted to one of
44475 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44482 \begin_inset space ~
44488 \begin_inset Newline newline
44491 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44492 names to refer to them:
44495 \begin_layout Itemize
44501 \begin_inset Newline newline
44506 page_backgroundcolor
44509 \begin_layout Itemize
44513 \begin_inset space ~
44519 \begin_inset Newline newline
44527 \begin_layout Itemize
44531 \begin_inset space ~
44537 \begin_inset Newline newline
44545 \begin_layout Itemize
44549 \begin_inset space ~
44555 \begin_inset Newline newline
44563 \begin_layout Standard
44564 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44567 \begin_inset space ~
44575 \begin_inset space ~
44583 \begin_layout Section
44587 \begin_layout Standard
44588 Here you can adjust the
44592 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44596 as described in section
44597 \begin_inset space ~
44601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44603 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44610 \begin_layout Section
44614 \begin_layout Standard
44615 Here you can specify if a
44616 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887883
44619 citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44621 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887840
44627 \begin_inset Index idx
44630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44632 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887846
44634 -packages ! biblatex
44646 \begin_inset Index idx
44649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44661 \begin_inset Index idx
44664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44666 -packages ! jurabib
44673 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887869
44674 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44676 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887870
44681 Sectioned bibliography
44683 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44689 \begin_inset Index idx
44692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44694 -packages ! bibtopic
44700 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887945
44702 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44707 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887949
44709 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887950
44713 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887962
44720 for the generation of the bibliography.
44721 For a further description
44722 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887970
44726 \begin_inset space ~
44730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44732 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44739 \begin_layout Section
44743 \begin_layout Standard
44744 Here you can define the
44748 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44750 \begin_inset space ~
44754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44756 reference "sec:Index"
44763 \begin_layout Section
44767 \begin_layout Standard
44768 The PDF properties are explained in section
44769 \begin_inset space ~
44773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44775 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44782 \begin_layout Section
44786 \begin_layout Standard
44787 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44788 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44794 \begin_inset Index idx
44797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44799 -packages ! amsmath
44809 \begin_inset Index idx
44812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44814 -packages ! amssymb
44824 \begin_inset Index idx
44827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44839 \begin_inset Index idx
44842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44854 \begin_inset Index idx
44857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44859 -packages ! mathdots
44869 \begin_inset Index idx
44872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44874 -packages ! mathtools
44884 \begin_inset Index idx
44887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44899 \begin_inset Index idx
44902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44904 -packages ! stackrel
44914 \begin_inset Index idx
44917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44919 -packages ! stmaryrd
44929 \begin_inset Index idx
44932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44934 -packages ! undertilde
44939 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44942 \begin_layout Description
44943 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44944 -errors in formulas,
44945 ensure that you have this enabled.
44948 \begin_layout Description
44949 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44950 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44951 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44955 \begin_layout Description
44956 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44959 \begin_inset space ~
44971 \begin_layout Description
44972 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44987 \begin_layout Description
44988 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44999 \begin_layout Description
45000 mathtools is used for the math commands
45036 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45043 \begin_layout Description
45044 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45046 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45055 \begin_layout Description
45056 stackrel is used for the math command
45073 \begin_layout Description
45074 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45077 \begin_layout Description
45078 undertilde is used for the math command
45086 Accents for one Character
45095 \begin_layout Section
45099 \begin_layout Standard
45100 The float placement options are described in the section
45103 \begin_inset space ~
45111 \begin_inset space ~
45119 \begin_layout Section
45123 \begin_layout Standard
45124 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45126 Program Code Listings
45131 \begin_inset space ~
45139 \begin_layout Section
45143 \begin_layout Standard
45144 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45152 set to be used and set the
45157 The itemize environment is described in section
45158 \begin_inset space ~
45162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45164 reference "sec:Itemize"
45171 \begin_layout Standard
45172 You can furthermore specify a
45175 \begin_inset space ~
45180 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45181 command of the desired character.
45182 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45189 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45195 \begin_inset space \space{}
45199 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45209 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45210 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45213 \begin_layout Standard
45214 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45222 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45223 -packages in the preamble (menu
45226 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45227 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45230 \begin_inset space ~
45236 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45240 usepackage{textcomp}
45243 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45247 usepackage{amssymb}
45257 \begin_layout Section
45261 \begin_layout Standard
45262 Branches are described in section
45263 \begin_inset space ~
45267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45269 reference "sec:Branches"
45276 \begin_layout Section
45278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45280 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45287 \begin_layout Standard
45288 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45291 \begin_layout Description
45293 \begin_inset space ~
45297 \begin_inset space ~
45300 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45320 View Master Document
45321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45328 Update Master Document
45329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45336 menu or the toolbar.
45337 The default is set in
45339 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45340 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45342 \begin_inset space ~
45345 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45349 \begin_inset space ~
45353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45355 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45362 \begin_layout Description
45364 \begin_inset space ~
45368 \begin_inset space ~
45371 Output settings for the menu
45373 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45375 \begin_inset space ~
45381 For a detailed description see section
45383 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45388 \begin_inset space ~
45396 \begin_layout Description
45398 \begin_inset space ~
45402 \begin_inset space ~
45405 Options offers settings for the export format
45413 \begin_inset space ~
45418 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45419 \begin_inset space ~
45422 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45426 \begin_inset space ~
45431 settings are described in detail in section
45433 Math Output in XHTML
45438 \begin_inset space ~
45447 \begin_inset space ~
45451 \begin_inset space ~
45456 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45459 \begin_layout Description
45461 \begin_inset space ~
45466 Save transient properties
45468 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45469 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45470 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45474 \begin_layout Itemize
45475 the activation of change tracking
45478 \begin_layout Itemize
45479 the output of tracked changes
45482 \begin_layout Itemize
45483 the recording of the document directory path.
45486 \begin_layout Standard
45487 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45488 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45492 \begin_layout Section
45500 \begin_layout Standard
45501 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45503 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45505 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45507 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45511 \begin_layout Standard
45512 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45513 -syntax is given in section
45514 \begin_inset space ~
45518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45520 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45527 \begin_layout Chapter
45533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45535 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45540 \begin_inset Index idx
45543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45552 \begin_layout Standard
45553 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45555 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45559 It has the following submenus.
45562 \begin_layout Section
45566 \begin_layout Subsection
45570 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45571 User Interface File
45572 \begin_inset Index idx
45575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45576 Customization ! of toolbars
45582 \begin_inset Index idx
45585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45586 Customization ! of menus
45594 \begin_layout Standard
45595 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45596 interface (ui) file.
45597 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45605 \begin_layout Description
45610 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45613 \begin_layout Description
45620 the menu entries in popup context menus
45623 \begin_layout Description
45628 specifies the toolbar buttons
45631 \begin_layout Standard
45632 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45633 and edit the entries.
45636 \begin_layout Standard
45637 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45649 entries must be finished with an explicit
45674 and in the case of the
45675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45687 The syntax for the entries is:
45690 \begin_layout Standard
45691 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45720 \begin_layout Standard
45722 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45725 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45726 -functions are listed in the menu
45728 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45730 \begin_inset space ~
45738 \begin_layout Standard
45739 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45745 \begin_layout Standard
45746 For example, assuming you use the menu
45748 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45751 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45755 \begin_layout Standard
45756 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45780 \begin_layout Standard
45782 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45797 to have the sixth bookmark.
45800 \begin_layout Standard
45804 \begin_inset space ~
45809 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45810 's toolbar buttons.
45811 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45812 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45815 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45827 \begin_layout Standard
45830 Enable tool tips in main work area
45832 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45836 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45840 \begin_layout Standard
45845 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45846 should display in the menu
45848 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45850 \begin_inset space ~
45858 \begin_layout Subsection
45862 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45866 \begin_layout Standard
45869 Restore window layouts and geometries
45872 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45873 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45877 \begin_layout Standard
45880 Restore cursor positions
45882 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45886 \begin_layout Standard
45889 Load opened files from last session
45891 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45895 \begin_layout Standard
45898 Clear all session information
45900 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45901 sessions (cursor positions, names
45902 of last opened documents, etc.).
45905 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45909 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45914 \begin_inset Index idx
45917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45926 \begin_layout Standard
45929 Backup original documents when saving
45931 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45932 it was saved the last time.
45933 It is stored in the
45936 \begin_inset space ~
45942 \begin_inset space ~
45946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45948 reference "sec:Paths"
45952 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45955 \begin_inset space ~
45961 The backup file has the file extension
45962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45976 \begin_layout Standard
45979 Backup documents, every
45981 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45984 \begin_layout Standard
45987 Save documents compressed by default
45989 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45990 \begin_inset space ~
45994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45996 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46001 This applies to newly created documents only.
46002 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46006 Windows & work area
46009 \begin_layout Standard
46012 Open documents in tabs
46014 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46018 \begin_layout Standard
46023 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46030 \begin_inset space ~
46034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46036 reference "sec:Paths"
46040 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46047 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46048 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46049 of \SpecialChar LyX
46051 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46052 instance is created for each file.
46055 \begin_layout Standard
46058 Single close-tab button
46060 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46070 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46071 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46072 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
46076 \begin_layout Standard
46077 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46085 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46086 before the change takes effect.
46094 \begin_layout Standard
46099 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46101 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46103 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46107 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46108 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46109 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46112 \begin_layout Subsection
46114 \begin_inset Index idx
46117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46126 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46133 \begin_layout Standard
46134 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46138 \begin_layout Standard
46139 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46147 This section only deals with the fonts
46151 the \SpecialChar LyX
46153 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46157 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46168 \begin_layout Standard
46169 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46186 (depends on the system) as its
46189 \begin_inset space ~
46205 \begin_layout Standard
46206 You can change the font size with the
46213 \begin_layout Standard
46218 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46223 points have the size of 1
46224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46228 \begin_inset space ~
46232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46234 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46239 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46244 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46245 \begin_inset space ~
46249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46251 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46258 \begin_layout Standard
46261 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46263 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46264 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46265 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46266 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46267 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46269 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46270 \begin_inset space ~
46276 \begin_layout Subsection
46278 \begin_inset Index idx
46281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46282 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46289 \begin_inset Index idx
46292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46301 \begin_layout Standard
46302 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46303 by choosing an item in the
46304 list and selecting the
46311 \begin_layout Standard
46312 By checking the option
46316 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46319 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46320 \begin_inset space ~
46324 \begin_inset space ~
46329 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46332 \begin_layout Subsection
46334 \begin_inset Index idx
46337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46346 \begin_layout Standard
46347 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46351 \begin_layout Standard
46356 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46357 This feature is described in section
46358 \begin_inset space ~
46362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46364 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46371 \begin_layout Standard
46372 Checking the option
46375 \begin_inset space ~
46379 \begin_inset space ~
46383 \begin_inset space ~
46388 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46391 \begin_layout Section
46393 \begin_inset Index idx
46396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46405 \begin_layout Subsection
46409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46413 \begin_layout Standard
46416 Cursor follows scrollbar
46418 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46422 \begin_layout Standard
46423 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46424 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46425 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46428 \begin_layout Standard
46431 Scroll below end of document
46433 is self-explanatory.
46436 \begin_layout Standard
46437 In \SpecialChar LyX
46438 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46445 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46447 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46448 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46451 \begin_layout Standard
46454 Sort environments alphabetically
46456 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46459 \begin_layout Standard
46462 Group environments by their category
46464 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46467 \begin_layout Standard
46472 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46487 \begin_layout Standard
46488 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46493 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46494 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46498 \begin_layout Subsection
46500 \begin_inset Index idx
46503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46510 \begin_inset Index idx
46513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46514 Settings ! Shortcuts
46522 \begin_layout Standard
46527 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46529 Several binding files are available, among them:
46532 \begin_layout Description
46533 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46536 \begin_layout Description
46537 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46549 \begin_layout Description
46550 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46561 \begin_layout Standard
46562 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46567 , and binding files for special languages.
46568 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46569 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46573 \begin_inset space \space{}
46577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46585 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46586 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46587 will try to use the appropriate binding
46591 \begin_layout Standard
46592 Some binding files, like
46596 , only have a limited scope.
46597 When looking at the end of the file
46601 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46604 \begin_layout Standard
46608 \begin_inset space ~
46612 \begin_inset space ~
46617 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46618 in the selected key binding file.
46621 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46625 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46630 \begin_inset Index idx
46633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46634 Key Bindings ! Editing
46642 \begin_layout Standard
46643 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46644 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46645 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46646 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46649 Show key-bindings containing
46652 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46653 Insert there for example as keyword
46654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46661 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46662 functions that contain
46663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46671 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46672 All \SpecialChar LyX
46673 functions are also listed in the file
46678 that you will find in the
46685 \begin_layout Standard
46686 For example, to add the shortcut
46694 , select the function and press the
46699 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46700 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46703 \begin_layout Standard
46704 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46705 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46707 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46708 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46710 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46715 \begin_layout Standard
46716 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46719 \begin_layout Standard
46720 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46722 The syntax of the entries is:
46725 \begin_layout Standard
46731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46750 \begin_layout Subsection
46752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46754 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46759 \begin_inset Index idx
46762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46769 \begin_inset Index idx
46772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46773 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46781 \begin_layout Standard
46782 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46783 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46784 provides keyboard maps.
46785 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46786 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46789 \begin_inset space ~
46793 \begin_inset space ~
46798 and select the keyboard map file named
46805 \begin_layout Standard
46814 keyboard map and, if you use the
46818 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46821 arg "keymap-primary"
46827 arg "keymap-secondary"
46830 respectively or toggle between them with
46833 arg "keymap-toggle"
46839 \begin_layout Standard
46840 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46848 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46857 \begin_layout Standard
46858 You can also specify the mouse
46860 Wheel scrolling speed
46863 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46867 Middle mouse button pasting
46869 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46870 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46873 \begin_layout Standard
46881 \begin_inset space ~
46885 \begin_inset space ~
46890 you can select a key for zooming.
46891 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46894 \begin_layout Subsection
46898 \begin_layout Standard
46899 Input completion is described in section
46900 \begin_inset space ~
46904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46906 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46913 \begin_layout Section
46915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46922 \begin_inset Index idx
46925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46932 \begin_inset Index idx
46935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46944 \begin_layout Standard
46945 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46946 are normally determined during
46948 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46951 \begin_layout Description
46953 \begin_inset space ~
46956 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46957 's working directory.
46958 It is the default when you
46969 \begin_inset space ~
46977 \begin_layout Description
46979 \begin_inset space ~
46982 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46984 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46986 \begin_inset space ~
46990 \begin_inset space ~
46998 \begin_layout Description
47000 \begin_inset space ~
47003 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47009 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47013 \begin_inset Newline newline
47017 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47029 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47030 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47038 \begin_layout Description
47040 \begin_inset space ~
47044 \begin_inset Index idx
47047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47053 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47054 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47055 \begin_inset space ~
47059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47061 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47069 will be used to save the backups.
47070 \begin_inset Newline newline
47073 Backup files have the ending
47074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47084 \begin_layout Description
47086 \begin_inset space ~
47089 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47090 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47092 \begin_inset Newline newline
47099 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47105 You can edit this file with the program
47114 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47115 in its preferences under
47118 \begin_inset space ~
47124 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47129 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47131 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47132 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47138 and \SpecialChar LyX
47139 need to be running the same time.
47140 \begin_inset Newline newline
47143 The pipe is also used for the
47147 feature, see section
47148 \begin_inset space ~
47152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47154 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47159 \begin_inset Newline newline
47162 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47163 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47164 \begin_inset Newline newline
47180 \begin_layout Description
47182 \begin_inset space ~
47185 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47188 \begin_layout Description
47190 \begin_inset space ~
47193 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47194 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47195 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47198 \begin_layout Description
47200 \begin_inset space ~
47203 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47209 You only need to specify it if you are using
47213 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47215 For \SpecialChar LyX
47220 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47224 \begin_layout Description
47226 \begin_inset space ~
47229 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47230 When \SpecialChar LyX
47231 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47232 to find it on the system.
47233 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47235 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47244 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47245 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47248 \begin_layout Description
47250 \begin_inset space ~
47253 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47254 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47255 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47256 code or in the document
47258 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47260 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47261 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47262 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47263 scanned for the input files.
47264 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47265 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47267 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47268 compilation may fail for some documents.
47271 \begin_layout Section
47275 \begin_layout Standard
47276 Here you can insert your
47285 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47287 \begin_inset space ~
47291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47293 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47297 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47300 \begin_layout Section
47302 \begin_inset Index idx
47305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47306 Language ! Settings
47312 \begin_inset Index idx
47315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47316 Settings ! Language
47324 \begin_layout Subsection
47326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47328 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47335 \begin_layout Description
47337 \begin_inset space ~
47341 \begin_inset space ~
47344 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47346 You can find its actual translation status here:
47347 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47349 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47357 \begin_layout Description
47359 \begin_inset space ~
47362 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47363 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47364 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47365 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47382 The most widespread language package is
47387 \begin_inset Index idx
47390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47397 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47399 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47400 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47401 come with the alternative
47407 \begin_inset Index idx
47410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47412 -packages ! polyglossia
47417 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47418 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47424 The available selections are described in section
47425 \begin_inset space ~
47429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47431 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47438 \begin_layout Description
47440 \begin_inset space ~
47443 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47444 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47445 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47446 An example is the start command
47452 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47454 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47458 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47474 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47479 \begin_layout Description
47481 \begin_inset space ~
47489 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47490 command toggles the package on and off.
47493 \begin_layout Description
47495 \begin_inset space ~
47499 \begin_inset space ~
47502 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47506 \begin_layout Description
47508 \begin_inset space ~
47512 \begin_inset space ~
47515 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47519 \begin_layout Description
47521 \begin_inset space ~
47525 \begin_inset space ~
47528 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47529 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47530 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47532 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47539 \begin_layout Description
47541 \begin_inset space ~
47544 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47546 When this option is not set, the
47549 \begin_inset space ~
47554 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47556 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47559 \begin_inset space ~
47567 \begin_layout Description
47569 \begin_inset space ~
47575 \begin_inset space ~
47581 When it is not set, the
47584 \begin_inset space ~
47589 is set to the end of the document.
47592 \begin_layout Description
47594 \begin_inset space ~
47598 \begin_inset space ~
47601 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47602 language will be underlined in blue.
47605 \begin_layout Description
47607 \begin_inset space ~
47611 \begin_inset space ~
47614 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47615 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47618 \begin_layout Description
47620 \begin_inset space ~
47623 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47624 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47625 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47626 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47629 \begin_layout Subsection
47633 \begin_layout Standard
47634 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47635 \begin_inset space ~
47639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47641 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47648 \begin_layout Section
47652 \begin_layout Subsection
47654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47656 name "subsec:General-output"
47663 \begin_layout Description
47665 \begin_inset space ~
47668 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47670 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47672 \begin_inset space ~
47678 For a detailed description see section
47680 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47685 \begin_inset space ~
47693 \begin_layout Description
47695 \begin_inset space ~
47698 Options Options for the program
47702 that is used for the export format
47707 \begin_inset space ~
47711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47713 reference "subsec:Export"
47718 Possible options are listed in the
47723 \begin_inset Newline newline
47727 \begin_inset Flex URL
47730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47732 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47742 \begin_layout Description
47744 \begin_inset space ~
47748 \begin_inset space ~
47751 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47754 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47755 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47763 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47766 \begin_layout Description
47768 \begin_inset space ~
47772 \begin_inset Index idx
47775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47782 \begin_inset Index idx
47785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47786 Settings ! Date format
47791 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47792 \begin_inset Newline newline
47796 \begin_inset Flex URL
47799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47801 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47807 \begin_inset Newline newline
47810 For example the format
47811 \begin_inset Newline newline
47815 \begin_inset Newline newline
47818 prints the date as day/month/year.
47821 \begin_layout Description
47823 \begin_inset space ~
47827 \begin_inset space ~
47830 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47831 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47834 \begin_layout Subsection
47840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47842 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47847 \begin_inset Index idx
47850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47851 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47860 \begin_layout Description
47862 \begin_inset space ~
47870 \begin_inset space ~
47874 \begin_inset space ~
47877 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47882 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47903 are used for Cyrillic.
47904 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47917 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47919 sets up in the background.
47920 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47923 \begin_layout Description
47925 \begin_inset space ~
47929 \begin_inset space ~
47933 \begin_inset space ~
47937 \begin_inset space ~
47940 options They only have an effect when the program
47944 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47947 \begin_layout Standard
47948 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47949 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47950 manuals of the applications.
47953 \begin_layout Description
47955 \begin_inset space ~
47958 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47959 \begin_inset space ~
47963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47965 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47972 \begin_layout Description
47974 \begin_inset space ~
47977 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47978 \begin_inset space ~
47982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47984 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47991 \begin_layout Description
47993 \begin_inset space ~
47996 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47997 \begin_inset space ~
48001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48003 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48010 \begin_layout Description
48016 \begin_inset space ~
48019 command Command for the program
48021 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48024 that is described in the section
48026 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48031 Additional Features
48036 \begin_layout Standard
48037 There are additionally the following options:
48040 \begin_layout Description
48042 \begin_inset space ~
48046 \begin_inset space ~
48050 \begin_inset space ~
48054 \begin_inset space ~
48059 \begin_inset space ~
48062 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48080 to separate folders.
48081 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48083 \begin_inset Index idx
48086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48093 \begin_inset Index idx
48096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48105 \begin_layout Description
48107 \begin_inset space ~
48111 \begin_inset space ~
48115 \begin_inset space ~
48119 \begin_inset space ~
48123 \begin_inset space ~
48127 \begin_inset space ~
48130 changes Removes all manually set
48136 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48137 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48139 \begin_inset space ~
48144 dialog when changing the document class.
48147 \begin_layout Section
48149 \begin_inset space ~
48153 \begin_inset Index idx
48156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48165 \begin_layout Subsection
48167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48169 name "subsec:Converters"
48174 \begin_inset Index idx
48177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48186 \begin_layout Standard
48187 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48188 from one format to another.
48189 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48190 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48197 \begin_inset space ~
48202 field and press the
48207 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48211 \begin_inset space ~
48216 drop-down list, modify the
48220 field and press the
48227 \begin_layout Standard
48230 Converter File Cache
48236 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48238 Maximum Age (in days
48241 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48242 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48245 \begin_layout Standard
48246 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48247 definition, is described in the section
48258 \begin_layout Subsection
48260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48262 name "sec:File-Formats"
48267 \begin_inset Index idx
48270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48277 \begin_inset Index idx
48280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48289 \begin_layout Standard
48290 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48300 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48303 \begin_layout Standard
48304 You can also define the
48306 Default output format
48308 that is used when you use
48310 View, Update, View Master Document
48314 Update Master Document
48320 menu or the toolbar.
48323 \begin_layout Standard
48324 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48335 \begin_layout Standard
48336 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48338 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48339 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48340 This is done by specifying a
48345 More about this is described in the section
48356 \begin_layout Chapter
48357 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48359 \begin_inset Index idx
48362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48371 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48378 \begin_layout Standard
48380 \begin_inset space ~
48384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48386 reference "tab:Units"
48390 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48391 and used in this documentation.
48394 \begin_layout Standard
48395 \begin_inset Float table
48401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48402 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48420 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48428 \begin_inset Tabular
48429 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48430 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48431 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48432 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48433 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48570 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48639 scaled point (65536
48640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48718 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48791 % of original image width
48796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49107 \begin_layout Chapter
49109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49111 name "chap:Credits"
49118 \begin_layout Standard
49119 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49120 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49123 \begin_layout Itemize
49126 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49129 \begin_layout Itemize
49135 \begin_layout Itemize
49141 \begin_layout Itemize
49147 \begin_layout Itemize
49153 \begin_layout Itemize
49159 \begin_layout Itemize
49165 \begin_layout Itemize
49171 \begin_layout Itemize
49174 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49177 \begin_layout Itemize
49183 \begin_layout Itemize
49189 \begin_layout Itemize
49195 \begin_layout Itemize
49201 \begin_layout Itemize
49207 \begin_layout Itemize
49213 \begin_layout Itemize
49219 \begin_layout Itemize
49225 \begin_layout Itemize
49226 The \SpecialChar LyX
49228 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49238 \begin_layout Standard
49239 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49242 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49249 \begin_layout Bibliography
49250 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49251 LatexCommand bibitem
49258 The \SpecialChar LyX
49260 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49263 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49269 \begin_inset Newline newline
49273 \begin_inset Flex URL
49276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49278 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49286 \begin_layout Bibliography
49287 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49288 LatexCommand bibitem
49289 key "latexcompanion"
49294 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49296 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49297 Companion Second Edition.
49300 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49303 \begin_layout Bibliography
49304 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49305 LatexCommand bibitem
49311 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49314 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49318 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49321 \begin_layout Bibliography
49322 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49323 LatexCommand bibitem
49332 : A Document Preparation System.
49335 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49338 \begin_layout Bibliography
49339 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49340 LatexCommand bibitem
49350 The \SpecialChar TeX
49354 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49357 \begin_layout Bibliography
49358 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49359 LatexCommand bibitem
49365 The \SpecialChar TeX
49367 \begin_inset Newline newline
49371 \begin_inset Flex URL
49374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49376 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49384 \begin_layout Bibliography
49385 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49386 LatexCommand bibitem
49392 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49394 \begin_inset Newline newline
49398 \begin_inset Flex URL
49401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49403 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49411 \begin_layout Bibliography
49412 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49413 LatexCommand bibitem
49420 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49422 name "Documentation"
49423 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49430 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49434 \begin_inset Newline newline
49438 \begin_inset Flex URL
49441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49443 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49451 \begin_layout Bibliography
49452 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49453 LatexCommand bibitem
49460 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49462 name "Documentation"
49463 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49468 how to use the program
49470 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49474 \begin_inset Newline newline
49478 \begin_inset Flex URL
49481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49483 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49491 \begin_layout Bibliography
49492 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49493 LatexCommand bibitem
49500 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49503 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49508 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49514 \begin_inset Index idx
49517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49519 -packages ! biblatex
49525 \begin_inset Newline newline
49529 \begin_inset Flex URL
49532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49534 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49542 \begin_layout Bibliography
49543 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49544 LatexCommand bibitem
49551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49553 name "Documentation"
49554 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49564 \begin_inset Newline newline
49568 \begin_inset Flex URL
49571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49573 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49581 \begin_layout Bibliography
49582 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49583 LatexCommand bibitem
49584 key "makeindex-man"
49590 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49593 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49603 \begin_inset Newline newline
49607 \begin_inset Flex URL
49610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49612 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49620 \begin_layout Bibliography
49621 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49622 LatexCommand bibitem
49629 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49631 name "Documentation"
49632 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49642 \begin_inset Newline newline
49646 \begin_inset Flex URL
49649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49651 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49659 \begin_layout Bibliography
49660 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49661 LatexCommand bibitem
49668 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49670 name "Documentation"
49671 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49676 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49678 \begin_inset Newline newline
49682 \begin_inset Flex URL
49685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49687 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49695 \begin_layout Bibliography
49696 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49697 LatexCommand bibitem
49704 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49706 name "Documentation"
49707 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49712 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49718 \begin_inset Index idx
49721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49723 -packages ! caption
49729 \begin_inset Newline newline
49733 \begin_inset Flex URL
49736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49738 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49746 \begin_layout Bibliography
49747 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49748 LatexCommand bibitem
49755 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49757 name "Documentation"
49758 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49763 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49769 \begin_inset Index idx
49772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49774 -packages ! enumitem
49780 \begin_inset Newline newline
49784 \begin_inset Flex URL
49787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49789 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49797 \begin_layout Bibliography
49798 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49799 LatexCommand bibitem
49806 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49808 name "Documentation"
49809 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49814 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49820 \begin_inset Index idx
49823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49825 -packages ! fancyhdr
49831 \begin_inset Newline newline
49835 \begin_inset Flex URL
49838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49840 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49848 \begin_layout Bibliography
49849 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49850 LatexCommand bibitem
49857 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49859 name "Documentation"
49860 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49865 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49871 \begin_inset Index idx
49874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49876 -packages ! hyperref
49882 \begin_inset Newline newline
49886 \begin_inset Flex URL
49889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49891 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49899 \begin_layout Bibliography
49900 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49901 LatexCommand bibitem
49908 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49910 name "Documentation"
49911 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49916 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49922 \begin_inset Index idx
49925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49927 -packages ! nomencl
49933 \begin_inset Newline newline
49937 \begin_inset Flex URL
49940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49942 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49950 \begin_layout Bibliography
49951 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49952 LatexCommand bibitem
49959 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49961 name "Documentation"
49962 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49967 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49973 \begin_inset Index idx
49976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49978 -packages ! prettyref
49984 \begin_inset Newline newline
49988 \begin_inset Flex URL
49991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49993 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50001 \begin_layout Bibliography
50002 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50003 LatexCommand bibitem
50010 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50012 name "Documentation"
50013 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50018 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50024 \begin_inset Index idx
50027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50029 -packages ! refstyle
50035 \begin_inset Newline newline
50039 \begin_inset Flex URL
50042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50044 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50052 \begin_layout Bibliography
50053 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50054 LatexCommand bibitem
50061 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50064 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50069 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50071 \begin_inset Newline newline
50075 \begin_inset Flex URL
50078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50080 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50088 \begin_layout Bibliography
50089 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50090 LatexCommand bibitem
50097 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50100 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50105 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50107 \begin_inset Newline newline
50111 \begin_inset Flex URL
50114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50116 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50124 \begin_layout Bibliography
50125 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50126 LatexCommand bibitem
50133 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50136 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50141 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50142 for Cyrillic languages:
50143 \begin_inset Newline newline
50147 \begin_inset Flex URL
50150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50152 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50160 \begin_layout Bibliography
50161 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50162 LatexCommand bibitem
50169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50172 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50177 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50179 \begin_inset Newline newline
50183 \begin_inset Flex URL
50186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50188 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50196 \begin_layout Bibliography
50197 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50198 LatexCommand bibitem
50205 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50208 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50213 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50215 \begin_inset Newline newline
50219 \begin_inset Flex URL
50222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50224 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50232 \begin_layout Bibliography
50233 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50234 LatexCommand bibitem
50241 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50244 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50249 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50251 \begin_inset Newline newline
50255 \begin_inset Flex URL
50258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50260 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50268 \begin_layout Bibliography
50269 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50270 LatexCommand bibitem
50277 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50280 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50285 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50287 \begin_inset Newline newline
50291 \begin_inset Flex URL
50294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50296 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50304 \begin_layout Bibliography
50305 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50306 LatexCommand bibitem
50313 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50316 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50321 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50323 \begin_inset Newline newline
50327 \begin_inset Flex URL
50330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50332 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50340 \begin_layout Bibliography
50341 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50342 LatexCommand bibitem
50349 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50352 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50357 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50359 \begin_inset Newline newline
50363 \begin_inset Flex URL
50366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50368 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50376 \begin_layout Bibliography
50377 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50378 LatexCommand bibitem
50385 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50388 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50393 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50395 \begin_inset Newline newline
50399 \begin_inset Flex URL
50402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50404 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50412 \begin_layout Bibliography
50413 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50414 LatexCommand bibitem
50421 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50424 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50429 about new features in
50435 \begin_inset Newline newline
50439 \begin_inset Flex URL
50442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50444 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50452 \begin_layout Standard
50453 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50487 \begin_inset Note Note
50490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50497 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50498 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50499 bibliography is the second one:
50507 \begin_layout Standard
50508 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50509 LatexCommand bibtex
50510 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50511 options "biblio/alphadin"
50518 \begin_layout Standard
50519 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50523 \begin_layout Standard
50524 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50525 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50531 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50532 LatexCommand printindex